WO2020174767A1 - Pattern-added substrate manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, touch panel manufacturing method, and laminate - Google Patents

Pattern-added substrate manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, touch panel manufacturing method, and laminate Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020174767A1
WO2020174767A1 PCT/JP2019/044334 JP2019044334W WO2020174767A1 WO 2020174767 A1 WO2020174767 A1 WO 2020174767A1 JP 2019044334 W JP2019044334 W JP 2019044334W WO 2020174767 A1 WO2020174767 A1 WO 2020174767A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
acid
resin composition
photosensitive resin
composition layer
manufacturing
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2019/044334
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
山田 悟
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2021501569A priority Critical patent/JPWO2020174767A1/en
Priority to CN201980093022.8A priority patent/CN113474728A/en
Publication of WO2020174767A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020174767A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/40Treatment after imagewise removal, e.g. baking
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/42Stripping or agents therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/02Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding
    • H05K3/06Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding the conductive material being removed chemically or electrolytically, e.g. by photo-etch process

Definitions

  • Method for manufacturing patterned substrate Method for manufacturing circuit board, method for manufacturing touch panel, and laminated body
  • the present disclosure relates to a method for manufacturing a patterned substrate, a method for manufacturing a circuit board, a method for manufacturing a touch panel, and a laminate.
  • a technique for forming a conductive pattern such as a metal wiring is widely used, for example, in manufacturing a touch panel and in manufacturing a printed wiring board.
  • a display device having a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device (for example, an organic electroluminescence (M!!) display device and a liquid crystal display device)
  • various conductive patterns are provided inside the touch panel.
  • the conductive pattern include an electrode pattern corresponding to the sensor of the visual recognition portion, peripheral wiring, and extraction wiring.
  • a technique of forming a desired pattern through pattern exposure, development, and etching after applying a photosensitive transfer material to a substrate is used. It is possible (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 20 1 7-1 5 6 7 3 5).
  • polyethylene terephthalate (Mending) film or the like is usually used from the viewpoint of visibility.
  • a heat resistant insulating film such as an aromatic polyimide film is used (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 20000_2 1 2 8 0 2).
  • a photosensitive resin composition containing a polymer having a low glass transition temperature such as the photosensitive transfer material described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 20 1 715 6 7 35
  • the time from the exposure process to the next process can be set when the substrate is allowed to stand from the exposure process to the next process (eg, development process).
  • the line width of the obtained pattern decreases with the passage of time.
  • the conventional polyimide film described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2000-212128 is colored, and therefore can be applied to a display device having a touch panel. Considered difficult. Therefore, the above-mentioned polyimide film has not been studied as a substrate for pattern formation used in a touch panel.
  • An aspect of the present disclosure is to provide a method for producing a patterned substrate that can suppress a decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after exposure and that has excellent laminate suitability under high temperature conditions.
  • Another aspect of the present disclosure is to provide a method for manufacturing a circuit board that can suppress a decrease in the line width of circuit wiring due to the passage of time after exposure and that is excellent in laminate suitability under high temperature conditions. To do.
  • Another aspect of the present disclosure is to provide a method for manufacturing a touch panel including the method for manufacturing a circuit board.
  • Another aspect of the present disclosure is to provide a method for manufacturing a touch panel using a circuit board manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit board. ⁇ 2020/174767 3 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • Another aspect of the present disclosure is to provide a laminate capable of suppressing a decrease in the line width of a pattern due to the passage of time after exposure.
  • Means for solving the above problems include the following modes.
  • the above-mentioned photosensitive resin composition layer in a photosensitive transfer material comprising a temporary support and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° or higher, and a polyimide.
  • a method for producing a patterned substrate which comprises a step of bringing the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer material and the above-mentioned polyimide substrate into contact with each other by bringing the printed substrate into contact with each other.
  • the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is 50° to 90° and the heating temperature is 120° to 150° in the process of bonding the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate. ° ⁇ and the transfer speed is 2.5 / min ⁇ 5.
  • the acid-decomposable resin has a linear alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position (meth)acrylate compound, and has a branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position (meth)
  • An acrylate compound, a (meth)acrylate compound having a cyclic alkyl group having a carbon number of 4 to 20 at the ester position, and a (meth)acrylate compound having a cyclic ether group having a carbon number of 4 to 20 at the ester position is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position (meth)acrylate compound, and has a branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position (meth)
  • a method of manufacturing a substrate with turns is a method of manufacturing a substrate with turns.
  • ⁇ 6> The method for producing a patterned substrate according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, in which the haze of the polyimide substrate is 0.5% or less.
  • ⁇ 7> The method for producing a patterned substrate according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, in which the total light transmittance of the polyimide substrate is 85% or more.
  • ⁇ 9> The method for producing a patterned substrate according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8>, in which the polyimide substrate has a conductive layer.
  • a method for manufacturing a circuit board comprising: a step of etching a conductive layer; and a step of removing the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer, in this order.
  • ⁇ 11> The method for producing a circuit board according to ⁇ 10>, which has a step of exposing the entire surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer between the etching step and the removing step.
  • ⁇ 12> The method for producing a circuit board according to ⁇ 10> or ⁇ 11>, wherein the conductive layer is a copper layer or a silver layer.
  • a method for manufacturing a touch panel including the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to any one of ⁇ 10> to ⁇ 12>.
  • a touch panel manufacturing method including a step of preparing a circuit board manufactured by the circuit board manufacturing method according to any one of ⁇ 10> to ⁇ 12>.
  • a laminate comprising a polyimide substrate and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50° or higher.
  • a method for producing a patterned substrate which can suppress a decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after exposure and which is excellent in laminating suitability under high temperature conditions. be able to.
  • a method for manufacturing a touch panel including the method for manufacturing the circuit board.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic view showing an example of a layer structure of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of a pattern.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing an example of a pattern.
  • the numerical range represented by using “to” means a range including the numerical values described before and after “to” as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the upper limit value or the lower limit value of another stepwise described numerical range.
  • the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the value shown in the examples. ⁇ 2020/174767 6 ⁇ (: 171?2019/044334
  • (meth)acrylic means both and/or one of acrylic and methacrylic
  • (meth)acrylate means both acrylate and methacrylate, or either. Means either side.
  • the amount of each component in the composition means the total amount of the plurality of substances present in the composition, unless there is a plurality of substances corresponding to each component in the composition, unless otherwise specified. To do.
  • process is included in this term as long as the intended purpose of the process is achieved not only as an independent process but also when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. ..
  • the notation in which substitution and non-substitution are not included includes not only those having no substituent but also those having a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • mass % and weight % have the same meaning, and “mass part” and “part by weight” have the same meaning.
  • the chemical structural formula may be described as a simplified structural formula in which a hydrogen atom is omitted.
  • exposure includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using a particle beam such as an electron beam or an ion beam, unless otherwise specified.
  • the light used for exposure is not particularly limited.
  • a bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp deep ultraviolet rays represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (IIV light), X-rays, electron rays, etc.
  • Actinic rays active energy rays
  • a method of manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure includes a temporary support, a glass transition temperature ⁇ 2020/174767 7 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure can suppress a decrease in the line width of a pattern due to the passage of time after exposure, and has excellent laminating suitability under high temperature conditions.
  • the reason why the method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure exerts the above effects is not clear, but is presumed as follows.
  • the decrease in the line width of the pattern over time after exposure is considered to occur due to excessive decomposition of the photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer material applied to the method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure has a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher, thereby exposing Since it is possible to suppress the excessive diffusion of the acid in the photosensitive resin composition layer later, it is possible to suppress the excessive acid decomposition reaction of the photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the method for producing a substrate with butterflies according to the present disclosure is a photosensitive resin composition comprising: a temporary support; and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher.
  • the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate can be adhered to each other without the polyimide substrate deforming. Therefore, the adhesion between the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate can be improved. Therefore, it is considered that the method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure can suppress the decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after exposure, and is excellent in the suitability for lamination under high temperature conditions.
  • a method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure is a photosensitive transfer comprising: a temporary support; and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50° or higher.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer of the material and the polyimide substrate are brought into contact with each other, and the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate are bonded together.
  • the method of bonding the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate is not limited, and a known method can be applied.
  • the bonding of the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate is preferably performed by applying pressure and heating using, for example, a mouth.
  • known laminators such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and a talented laminator capable of increasing productivity can be used.
  • the laminating step is preferably a mouth-to-roll method, that is, a method in which a mouth-shaped photosensitive transfer material and a mouth-shaped polyimide substrate are bonded.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 100 ° ⁇ to 150 ° ⁇ , more preferably 1 1 0 ° ⁇ to 1 50 ° ⁇ , more preferably 1 20 ° ⁇ to 1 More preferably, it is 5°°, and particularly preferably 120°° to 140°°.
  • the heating temperature is 100 ° C. or higher, the photosensitive transfer material can be easily attached to the polyimide substrate.
  • the heating temperature is 150 ° C. or lower, deterioration of the film quality of the polyimide substrate can be suppressed.
  • the heating temperature in the bonding step refers to the surface temperature of the contact-type heating means.
  • the heating temperature in the bonding step is the same as that of the photosensitive transfer material or the polyimide up to the contact point between the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate. The temperature reached on each surface of the printed circuit board.
  • the transport speed is preferably 2.5 /min to 5.0 /min, more preferably 3.0 /min to 5.0 /min.
  • the above-mentioned transportation speed refers to each transportation speed of the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate transported in the bonding step.
  • the heating temperature is 1 20 ° ⁇ ⁇ 1 50 ° ⁇
  • the conveying speed 2. ⁇ 2020/174767 9 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • heating temperature is 120 °C to 140 °C
  • transport speed is 2.5 m/min to 5.
  • Om/min Is more preferable.
  • a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer after the bonding step (hereinafter, also referred to as "exposure step") ) And a step of developing the pattern-exposed photosensitive resin composition layer to form a pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer (hereinafter, also referred to as “developing step”). ..
  • the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure preferably has a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer after the attaching step.
  • a light source capable of irradiating light in a wavelength range capable of exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer is preferable.
  • the light source include an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, and an LED (Light Emitting Diode).
  • the exposure dose is preferably 5 mJ/cm 2 to 200 mJ/cm 2 ,
  • it is OmJ/cm 2 to 100 mJ/cm 2 .
  • the pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or direct exposure using a laser or the like.
  • pattern exposure may be performed after peeling the temporary support from the photosensitive resin composition layer, and pattern exposure may be performed via the temporary support before peeling the temporary support. After that, the temporary support may be peeled off.
  • exposing through a mask in order to prevent mask contamination due to contact between the photosensitive resin composition layer and the mask and to avoid the influence of foreign matter adhering to the mask on the exposure, remove the temporary support. It is preferable to carry out the pattern exposure without using it.
  • the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not limited, and may be set appropriately according to the purpose.
  • a display device such as a touch panel ⁇ 2020/174767 10 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • At least a part of the pattern is a fine wire of 100 or less. Is preferable, and a thin line of 70 or less is more preferable.
  • the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure preferably has a step of developing the pattern-exposed light-sensitive resin composition layer to form a pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the exposed intermediate layer is removed together with the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer in the developing step. Further, in the developing step, the intermediate layer in the unexposed area may also be removed by dissolving or dispersing it in a developing solution.
  • the development of the photosensitive resin composition layer that has been subjected to pattern exposure can be performed using a developer.
  • the developing solution is not limited as long as it is a developing solution capable of removing the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • known developing solutions such as the developing solution described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used.
  • a liquid can be used.
  • the developing solution is preferably a developing solution in which the exposed portion (in the case of a positive type) of the photosensitive resin composition layer has a dissolution type developing behavior.
  • the developing solution may further contain a water-soluble organic solvent and a surfactant. Examples of the developer suitably used in the present disclosure include the developers described in paragraph 0 19 4 of International Publication No. 20 15/093 2 7 1.
  • the developing solution it is also possible to use a developing solution in which the unexposed portion (in the case of a negative type) of the photosensitive resin composition layer has a dissolution type developing behavior.
  • a developing solution in which the unexposed portion (in the case of a negative type) of the photosensitive resin composition layer has a dissolution type developing behavior.
  • examples of such a developer include organic solvents such as butyl acetate.
  • Examples of development methods include paddle development, shower development, shower and spray. ⁇ 2020/174 767 1 1 ⁇ (: 171?2019/044334
  • Either pin development or dip development may be used.
  • shower development here, the exposed portion can be removed by spraying a developing solution onto the photosensitive resin composition layer after exposure with a shower. Further, after development, it is preferable to remove a development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like.
  • the liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° to 40 ° .
  • the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure may have a post-baking step in which a pattern containing a photosensitive resin composition layer obtained by development is heat-treated.
  • Temperature of the post baking is preferably 8 0 ° ⁇ ⁇ 2 5 0 ° ⁇ , more preferably 1 1 0 ° ⁇ ⁇ 1 7 0 ° ⁇ , 1 3 0 ° ⁇ ⁇ 1 5 Particularly preferred is 0°.
  • the post-baking time is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 minutes to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes.
  • Post bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
  • the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure includes a step of peeling off the protective film of the photosensitive transfer material (hereinafter , “Protective film peeling step”).
  • the protective film peeling step will be described in the section "Method for manufacturing circuit board" described later.
  • the patterned substrate produced by the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure includes at least a polyimide substrate and a photosensitive resin composition layer in this order.
  • a polyimide substrate is used as the substrate.
  • the polyimide forming the polyimide substrate is not limited as long as it is a polymer compound containing an imide bond, and a known polyimide can be used. Further, the polyimide substrate may be a commercially available product. Polyimide substrates are available, for example, as follows: IV IV! 0 (registered trademark) Ding 7 6 (made by A.S.T. Co., Ltd.) Ding [3 ⁇ 4 1 ⁇ /1 M 0 0 Ding 7 6 3 (I.D. .S.T.) or Kapton (registered trademark) 1001 to 1 (manufactured by Toray DuPont Co., Ltd.). Among the above-mentioned commercial products, the polyimide substrate is suitable for optical characteristics.
  • the value is X, or ⁇ [3 ⁇ 4 1 ⁇ /1 ⁇ 0 ⁇ zo 63.
  • the haze of the polyimide substrate is preferably 3.0% or less, more preferably 2.0% or less, still more preferably 1.0% or less, 0.5 It is particularly preferably not more than %.
  • the haze of the polyimide substrate is 3.0% or less, light scattering can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the display characteristics (for example, brightness) of the display device can be improved.
  • the lower limit of haze for polyimide substrates is not limited.
  • the haze of the polyimide substrate may be set appropriately in the range of 0% or more, for example.
  • the haze of the polyimide substrate is measured using a haze meter (for example, 0 1 to 1200, manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd.).
  • the total light transmittance of the polyimide substrate is preferably 85% or more, more preferably 88% or more, further preferably 90% or more, and 95% or more. It is particularly preferable that The light transmittance of the polyimide substrate can be improved because the total light transmittance of the polyimide substrate is 85% or more. Therefore, for example, the display characteristics (eg, brightness) of the display device can be improved.
  • the upper limit of the total light transmittance of the polyimide substrate is not limited.
  • the total light transmittance of the polyimide substrate may be set appropriately in the range of 100% or less, for example.
  • the total light transmittance of the polyimide substrate is measured using a spectrophotometer (for example, II V_210, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation). ⁇ 2020/174767 13 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the polyimide substrate may have a conductive layer.
  • the polyimide substrate has a conductive layer, it is preferable that the polyimide substrate has a conductive layer on at least one surface thereof.
  • the polyimide substrate has a conductive layer, it is preferable that at least the surface of the polyimide substrate on which the photosensitive transfer material is attached has conductivity. Since the polyimide substrate has the conductive layer, for example, a conductive pattern can be formed.
  • conductivity means that the volume resistivity is less than 1 X 10 6 Qcm, and the volume resistivity is less than 1 X 10 4 Q cm. preferable.
  • Examples of the conductive layer formed on the polyimide base material include any conductive layer used for general circuit wiring or touch panel wiring.
  • the conductive layer is selected from the group consisting of a metal layer, a conductive metal oxide layer, a graphene layer, a carbon nanotube layer, and a conductive polymer layer from the viewpoints of conductivity and fine wire forming property. At least one layer is preferable, at least one layer selected from the group consisting of a metal layer, and a conductive metal oxide layer is more preferable, and a metal layer is further preferable. A copper layer or a silver layer is particularly preferable.
  • Examples of the material forming the metal layer include aluminum, zinc, copper, iron, nickel, chromium, molybdenum, silver, and gold.
  • the material constituting the [0051] conductive metal oxide layer for example, I TO (I ndium T in Ox ide), IZ_ ⁇ (I ndium Z inc ⁇ _Xide), and S i ⁇ 2.
  • the polyimide substrate may have one conductive layer, or may have two or more conductive layers.
  • the polyimide substrate has two or more conductive layers, it is preferable that the polyimide substrate have conductive layers made of different materials. Further, when the polyimide substrate has two or more conductive layers, at least one conductive layer of the two or more conductive layers preferably contains a conductive metal oxide.
  • the thickness of the polyimide substrate is not limited and may be appropriately set depending on the application.
  • the average thickness of the polyimide substrate is preferably from 10 to 200100, from the viewpoint of strength, pattern linearity, and the controllability of M0, and is from 1101 to 1001. It is more preferable, and it is particularly preferable that it is from 1001 to 60.
  • the average thickness of the polyimide substrate is measured by the following method.
  • the photosensitive transfer material is a temporary support, and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher, Have.
  • a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher, Have In the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure, by using the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer material, it is possible to suppress excessive diffusion of acid in the photosensitive resin composition layer after exposure, and thus the photosensitive resin composition Excessive acid decomposition reaction of the layer can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after the exposure.
  • the photosensitive transfer material has a temporary support.
  • the temporary support is a support that supports the photosensitive resin composition layer and can be peeled from the photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the temporary support preferably has optical transparency from the viewpoint that the photosensitive resin composition layer can be exposed through the temporary support when the photosensitive resin composition layer is subjected to pattern exposure.
  • having light transmittance means that the transmittance of the dominant wavelength of the light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the dominant wavelength of the light used for pattern exposure is From the viewpoint of improving exposure sensitivity, 60% or more is preferable. ⁇ 2020/174767 1 5 (: 171?2019/044334
  • a method of measuring the transmittance there is a method of measuring using a spectrophotometer (eg, 1 ⁇ /1 0 0 3 6 " ⁇ 6 3" manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.).
  • Examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, and paper, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility.
  • Examples of the resin film include polyethylene terephthalate film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film, and polyimide film.
  • a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable as the temporary support.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is determined from the viewpoints of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding with a circuit wiring formation substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure step, and the like. It may be appropriately set according to the material.
  • the average thickness of the temporary support is preferably from 5 to 200!, and more preferably from 10
  • the average thickness of the temporary support is measured by a method according to the method for measuring the average thickness of the polyimide substrate.
  • the photosensitive transfer material has a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° or higher. Since the photosensitive transfer material has a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the line width of the pattern with the passage of time after exposure. ..
  • materials other than the acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° or higher are not limited, and are used in known acid-decomposable photosensitive resin composition layers. Known materials can be used.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer preferably contains an acid-decomposable resin and a photo-acid generator, and has an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. ⁇ 2020/174767 16 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer is preferably a chemically amplified photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer contains a photoacid generator such as an onium salt or an oxime sulfonate compound described below
  • a photoacid generator such as an onium salt or an oxime sulfonate compound described below
  • the acid generated in response to actinic radiation is It acts as a catalyst for the deprotection of protected acid groups. Since the acid generated by the action of one photon contributes to a large number of deprotection reactions, the quantum yield exceeds 1, which is a large value, for example, to the power of 10. As a result, high sensitivity is obtained.
  • quinonediazide compound when used as a photoacid generator that is sensitive to actinic rays, it produces a carboxy group by a sequential photochemical reaction, but its quantum yield is always 1 or less, which is applicable to the chemical amplification type. do not do.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer contains an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher. Since the photosensitive resin composition layer contains the acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after exposure.
  • the acid-decomposable resin is not limited as long as it has a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher and can be decomposed by the action of an acid.
  • the term “decomposition” is not limited to a reaction involving the breaking of a chemical bond, but includes a reaction involving the conversion of a chemical structure.
  • the acid-decomposable resin changes its polarity due to the action with acid, so that, for example, the solubility in a developing solution described later increases.
  • the acid-decomposable resin is preferably a polymer (polymer X) containing a constitutional unit (constitutional unit) having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
  • An acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is converted into an acid group through a deprotection reaction by the action of a catalytic amount of an acid substance such as an acid generated by exposure.
  • the polymer X is preferably an addition polymerization type polymer, and more preferably a polymer containing a structural unit derived from (meth)acrylic acid or its ester.
  • the polymer X has a structural unit other than the structural unit derived from (meth)acrylic acid or its ester (for example, a structural unit derived from a styrene compound or a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound). Good.
  • the structural unit is a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
  • the "acid group” means a proton-dissociable group in which ⁇ 3 is 12 or less. Acidic From the viewpoint of improving sensitivity, 3 is preferably 10 or less, and more preferably 6 or less. Further, ⁇ 3 of the acid group is preferably 15 or more.
  • the acid group is preferably a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group
  • the acid-decomposable group is not limited and known acid-decomposable groups can be used.
  • the acid-labile group include groups that are relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, acetal-type protecting groups such as 1-alkoxyalkyl group, tetrahydropyranyl group, and tetrahydrofuranyl group), and groups that are relatively difficult to be decomposed by acid. (For example, 1 6 "
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of acetal.
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a cyclic structure, more preferably a group having a tetrahydrofuran ring structure or a tetrahydropyran ring structure, and a group having a tetrahydrofuran ring structure. Is more preferably, and a tetrahydrofuranyl group is particularly preferable.
  • the acid-decomposable group has a molecular weight of from the viewpoint of suppressing the variation in the line width of the conductive wiring when applied to the formation of the conductive pattern. ⁇ 2020/174767 18 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • It is preferably an acid-decomposable group of 300 or less.
  • the constitutional unit is selected from the group consisting of a constitutional unit represented by the following formula 1, a constitutional unit represented by the formula 2, and a constitutional unit represented by the formula 3 from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. Preferably, it is at least one type of structural unit.
  • reel base Represents an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and [3 ⁇ 4 1 1 or [3 ⁇ 4 1 2, 13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and [ 14 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X 1 is a single bond or a divalent linking group, Represents a displacing group, and! ! Represents an integer from 0 to 4.
  • An aryl group, [3 ⁇ 4 23 represents an alkyl group, or an aryl group, [and 3 ⁇ 4 21 or [3 ⁇ 4 2 2, may form a cyclic ether linked and the [3 ⁇ 4 23, [3 ⁇ 4 24 is , Each independently, a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, or a cycloalkyl group. It represents a group and represents an integer of 0 to 3. ⁇ 2020/174767 19 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • Ekihachi 3 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group,
  • [ 33] may be linked to form a cyclic ether, [ 34 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X is a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the structural unit is more preferably a structural unit represented by Formula 3.
  • the constitutional unit represented by the formula 3 is a constitutional unit having a carboxy group protected by an acetal-type acid-decomposable group.
  • the polymer X contains the constitutional unit represented by the formula 3, the sensitivity during pattern formation is excellent and the resolution is further excellent.
  • 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl group and aryl group in [ 31 to [ 33] may have a substituent.
  • the number of ring members in the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • X in the formula 8. is preferably a single bond or an arylene group, and more preferably a single bond. X.
  • the arylene group in may have a substituent.
  • the content of the constituent unit 3 4 is a hydrogen atom in Formula 3 is preferably two 0 mass% or more.
  • the structural unit in the structural unit,
  • the content (content: weight ratio), 1 3 ⁇ - nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum It can be confirmed from the intensity ratio of the peak intensities calculated by the usual method from the measurement.
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a cyclic structure from the viewpoint of sensitivity, and more preferably a group having a tetrahydrofuran ring structure or a tetrahydropyran ring structure.
  • a group having a tetrahydrofuran ring structure is more preferable, and a tetrahydrofuranyl group is particularly preferable.
  • the polymer X may contain one kind of constitutional unit alone, or may contain two or more kinds of constitutional unit eight.
  • the content of the structural unit in the polymer X is 1 with respect to the total mass of the polymer X.
  • It is preferably 0% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 15% by mass to 50% by mass, and particularly preferably 20% by mass to 40% by mass. Within the above range, the resolution is further improved.
  • the content of the constitutional unit represents the total content of the two or more constitutional units.
  • the content of the repeating unit in the polymer X (content: weight ratio) can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity is calculated by a conventional method from 1 3 0 _ IV measurement!.
  • the polymer X may contain a constitutional unit having an acid group (hereinafter, also referred to as “constitutional unit”).
  • the structural unit M is an acid group not protected by an acid-decomposable group, ⁇ 2020/174767 21 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the polymer X is a structural unit having an acid group having no protecting group.
  • the polymer X contains the structural unit, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation becomes good, the polymer X easily dissolves in an alkaline developing solution in the developing step after pattern exposure, and the developing time can be shortened.
  • Examples of the acid group in the structural unit include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group.
  • the acid group is preferably a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group, and more preferably a carboxy group.
  • the polymer X may contain one kind of constitutional unit, or may contain two or more kinds of constitutional unit.
  • the content of the constitutional unit in the polymer X is preferably 0.01 mass% to 20 mass% with respect to the total mass of the polymer X, and 0.01 mass% to 1 It is more preferably 0% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass. Within the above range, the resolution becomes better.
  • the content of the above constitutional unit represents the total content of two or more types of constitutional unit.
  • Constituent unit Snake content in the polymer X (content: weight ratio) can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity is calculated by a conventional method from 1 3 0 _ IV measurement!.
  • structural unit (3) in addition to the above-mentioned structural unit 8 and structural unit M, other structural units (hereinafter, also referred to as “structural unit (3)”) are effective in the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure. It is preferable to include in the range which does not impair.
  • the monomer forming the structural unit ⁇ is not limited, and examples thereof include a styrene compound, (meth)acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth)acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth)acrylic acid aryl ester, and Saturated dicarboxylic acid gestels, Bicyclo unsaturated compounds, Maleimide compounds, Unsaturated aromatic compounds, Conjugated gen compounds, Unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, Unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, ⁇ 2020/174767 22 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • Examples thereof include unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides, unsaturated compounds having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, and other unsaturated compounds.
  • the structural unit O By adjusting at least one of the type and content of the structural unit O, various characteristics of the polymer X can be adjusted. In particular, by including the structural unit (3, the glass transition temperature, acid value, and hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity of the polymer X can be easily adjusted.
  • styrene for example, styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinyl benzoate, ethyl vinyl benzoate, (meth)methyl acrylate, ( (Meth)ethyl acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid 1 ⁇ !-propyl, (meth)isopropyl acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid 1 ⁇ !-butyl, (meth)acrylic acid 2-ethylhexyl, (meth)acrylic acid 2-hydroxyethyl, (meth)acrylic acid 2-hydroxypropyl, (meth)benzyl acrylate, (meth)cyclopentyl acrylate, (meth)cyclohexyl acrylate, (meth)isobornyl acrylate, acrylonitrile, or ethylene glycol mono
  • the structural unit (3 includes a structural unit having a basic group.
  • Examples of the basic group include groups having a nitrogen atom.
  • Examples of the group having a nitrogen atom include an aliphatic amino group, an aromatic amino group, and a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group, and an aliphatic amino group is preferable.
  • the aliphatic amino group may be any of a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, or a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoint of resolution, a secondary amino group, or a tertiary amino group A primary amino group is preferred.
  • Examples of the monomer forming the structural unit having a basic group include, for example, ⁇ 2020/174767 23 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the structural unit (3 is preferably a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, from the viewpoint of improving the electrical characteristics of the photosensitive transfer material.
  • the monomer that forms the unit include styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth)acrylate, cyclopentyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, isobornyl (meth)acrylate, and benzyl (meth)acrylate.
  • Acrylate is mentioned, and cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate is preferable.
  • the monomer forming the structural unit ⁇ 3 is preferably a (meth)acrylic acid alkyl ester from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • (meth)acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • Examples thereof include 2-butylhexyl butyl, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate.
  • the polymer X may contain one kind of constitutional unit ⁇ 3, or may contain two or more kinds of constitutional unit ⁇ .
  • the content of the structural unit ⁇ 3 is preferably 90% by mass or less, more preferably 85% by mass or less, particularly preferably 80% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the polymer X.
  • the content of the structural unit ⁇ is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and the adhesiveness are further improved.
  • the content of the constitutional units ⁇ 3 represents two or more kinds of constitutional units (the total content of 3).
  • the production method (synthesis method) of the polymer X is not limited.
  • the polymer X is, for example, a monomer for forming the structural unit, and further, if necessary, in an organic solvent containing a monomer for forming the structural unit and a monomer for forming the structural unit ⁇ , initiating the polymerization. It can be synthesized by polymerizing with an agent. The polymer X can also be synthesized by a so-called polymer reaction.
  • the acid-decomposable resin (preferably the polymer X) is a (meth)acrylate compound having a linear alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position from the viewpoint of resolution.
  • ester position used in the present disclosure will be described below.
  • “having a straight-chain alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position” means that a straight-chain alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is bonded to the bond site on the oxygen atom side of the ester bond.
  • the number of carbon atoms is 4 to 2
  • the cyclic alkyl group having 0 carbon atoms is preferably a cyclic alkyl group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 8 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a cyclohexyl group. .. ⁇ 2020/174767 27 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the number of carbon atoms is 4 to 2
  • the cyclic ether group having 0 carbon atoms is preferably a cyclic ether group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably a cyclic ether group having 5 to 8 carbon atoms, a tetrahydrofuranyl group, or a tetrahydropyranyl group. Is more preferable, and a tetrahydrofuranyl group is particularly preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth)acrylate compound is preferably 90% by mass or more, and more preferably 95% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the acid-decomposable resin. Is more preferable.
  • the upper limit of the content of the constituent unit derived from the (meth)acrylate compound is not limited.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth)acrylate compound may be appropriately set in the range of, for example, 100 mass% or less with respect to the total mass of the acid-decomposable resin.
  • the acid-decomposable resin (preferably the polymer X) contains a structural unit derived from at least one acrylic compound selected from the group consisting of acrylic acid, and an acrylate compound from the viewpoint of resolution. It is preferable.
  • the constituent unit derived from the acrylate compound is not limited, and examples thereof include constituent units derived from the various acrylate compounds described above.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from the acrylic compound is preferably 0% by mass to 40% by mass, and 0% by mass to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the acid-decomposable resin. It is more preferable that the amount is 5% by mass to 30% by mass.
  • the acid-decomposable resin (preferably the polymer X) is a (meth)acrylate compound having a linear alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position, and a branched chain having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • a (meth)acrylate compound having a cyclic alkyl group at the ester position a (meth)acrylate compound having a cyclic alkyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms at the ester position, and a cyclic ether group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms Containing 90% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the acid-decomposable resin, at least one structural unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound selected from the group consisting of (meth)acrylate compounds in the ester position, And acrylic acid and acrylate compounds ⁇ 2020/174767 28 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the constituent unit derived from at least one acrylic compound selected from the group consisting of When the acid-decomposable resin contains the above structural units in a specific ratio, the resolution can be improved and the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin can be adjusted within a desired numerical range.
  • the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is 50 ° ⁇ or higher, preferably 55° ⁇ or higher, more preferably 60° ⁇ or higher, and 70° ⁇ or higher. Is more preferable, and it is particularly preferable that it is 80° or more.
  • the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is 50 ° ⁇ or higher, the acid diffusion in the photosensitive resin composition layer can be suppressed after exposure to light, resulting in excessive acid decomposition of the photosensitive resin composition layer. The reaction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after the exposure.
  • the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is preferably 110 ° C or less
  • the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is 1100 ° or less, the suitability for lamination can be improved under high temperature conditions.
  • the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is preferably from 50 ° ⁇ ⁇ 90 ° ⁇ , more preferably from 55 ° ⁇ _ ⁇ 90 ° ⁇ , 55 ° ⁇ _ ⁇ 85 ° O is more preferable, 60° O to 85° O is particularly preferable, and 60 ° to 80 ° O is most preferable.
  • the glass transition temperature of the decomposable resin is within the above numerical range, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after exposure, and it is possible to improve the suitability for lamination under high temperature conditions.
  • the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is measured by a method according to the method described in "3 ⁇ 7 1 2 1 :1 987".
  • an extrapolated glass transition start temperature hereinafter, also referred to as “Chapter 9”.
  • the expected glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin ⁇ 2020/174767 29 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • Extrapolation glass transition onset temperature (Diagram 9), that is, the glass transition temperature in the present disclosure is as follows. It is calculated as the temperature at the intersection of the straight line extending the side baseline to the high temperature side and the tangent line drawn at the point where the slope of the curve of the step transition of the glass transition becomes maximum.
  • the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin for example, a method of adjusting the glass transition temperature using the equation (10) as a guideline can be mentioned.
  • the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin can be calculated based on the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of each constitutional unit constituting the desired acid-decomposable resin and the mass ratio of each constitutional unit. Can be adjusted.
  • homopolymers sheets 9 1 Ding 9 of the first structural unit, the mass fraction of the first configuration unit in the copolymer 1, a homopolymer of sheets 9 of the second structural unit and Ding 9 2, when the mass fraction of the second structural unit in the copolymer and ⁇ ⁇ / 2, a copolymer of Ding 90 including first and configuration unit and a second constitutional unit ( ⁇ : Kelvin) can be estimated according to the following formula.
  • the acid value of the acid-decomposable resin is 0 9 ⁇ 01 ⁇ 1/9 ⁇ 50 1119 Is preferred, ⁇ 2020/174767 30 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the acid value represents the mass of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize the acidic component per measurement sample 19.
  • V 3 Required for titration ⁇ .01 01 ⁇ ⁇ -Amount of sodium hydroxide used (011_)
  • the molecular weight of the acid-decomposable resin (preferably the polymer X) is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of polystyrene weight average molecular weight.
  • the temperature range for example, 150 ° ⁇
  • the weight average molecular weight of the acid-decomposable resin is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, more preferably 3,000 to 50,000.
  • the ratio (dispersion degree) of the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the polymer X is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, and more preferably 1.05 to 3.5. ⁇ 2020/174767 31 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the weight average molecular weight of the acid-decomposable resin is measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • various commercially available devices can be used, and the contents of the device and the measuring technique are known to those skilled in the art.
  • HLC weight average molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography
  • HLC registered trademark-1820GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) is used as a measuring device.
  • the columns are TS Kge I (registered trademark) Super H ZM— M (4.6 mm IDX 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), Super HZ 4000 (4.6 mm l DX l 5 cm, Tosoh Stock Association).
  • Supper HZ 3000 (4.6 mm l DX l 5 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and Super HZ 2000 (4.6 mm l DX l 5 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) Use those connected in series.
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • the sample concentration is 0.2% by mass
  • the flow rate is 0.35 mL/min
  • the sample injection amount is 10 ML
  • the measurement temperature is 40 ° C.
  • a differential refractive index (R) detector is used as the detector.
  • the calibration curve is “standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F—40”, “F—20”, “F—4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “A” -2500” and “A-1 000" can be manufactured using either of the 7 samples.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer may contain one type of acid-decomposable resin alone,
  • the content of the acid-decomposable resin is preferably 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass, and 70% by mass to 98% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition layer. I like to have it.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer contains an acid-decomposable resin and an acid protected by an acid-decomposable group. ⁇ 2020/174767 32 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • polymer component a polymer not containing a constitutional unit having a group
  • the acid-decomposable resin and the other polymer are collectively referred to as “polymer component”.
  • Examples of other polymers include polyhydroxystyrene.
  • Examples of commercially available polyhydroxystyrenes are 31 ⁇ /1 8 1 000, 31 ⁇ /1 8 2000, 31 ⁇ /1 8 3000, 31 ⁇ /1 8 1 440, 31 ⁇ /1 8 1 7352 , 31 ⁇ /1 Hachi 26259. and 3 IV! Hachi 3840 (above, manufactured by Sartomer), 11 001 3000, 110_
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer may contain one kind of another polymer alone, or may contain two or more kinds of other polymers.
  • the content of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less based on the total mass of the polymer component, It is more preferably at most% by mass, particularly preferably at most 20% by mass.
  • the content of the polymer component is, from the viewpoint of adhesion, 50% by mass to 9% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition layer. It is preferably 9.9% by mass, more preferably 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer preferably contains a photoacid generator.
  • the photo-acid generator used in the present disclosure includes ultraviolet rays, deep ultraviolet rays, X-rays, electron beams, etc. ⁇ 2020/174767 33 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • a compound capable of generating an acid when irradiated with an actinic ray is a compound capable of generating an acid when irradiated with an actinic ray.
  • a wavelength of 300 n or more preferably a wavelength of Compounds that generate an acid by reacting to actinic rays of 450 n ⁇ ! are preferable, but the chemical structure thereof is not limited.
  • a photo-acid generator that is not directly sensitive to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 n or more can be used by combining it with a sensitizer. Any compound capable of reacting with the above-mentioned actinic rays and generating an acid can be preferably used in combination with the sensitizer.
  • a photoacid generator that generates an acid of ⁇ 3 is 4 or less is preferable, and a photoacid generator that generates an acid of ⁇ 3 is 3 or less is more preferable, A photo-acid generator that generates an acid of 2 or less is particularly preferable.
  • the lower limit of ⁇ 3 is not specified. Is, for example, preferably not less than 10.0.
  • Examples of the photoacid generator include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
  • Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salt compounds and triarylsulfonium salt compounds, and quaternary ammonium salt compounds.
  • onium salt compounds are preferable, and diaryl iodonium salts or triaryl sulfonium salt compounds are particularly preferable.
  • the ionic photoacid generator described in paragraphs 0 1 1 4 to 0 1 3 3 of JP-A No. 2 041-85 6 4 3 can also be preferably used. ..
  • nonionic photoacid generator examples include trichloromethyl-3-triazine compounds, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds.
  • the oxime sulfonate compound is preferable from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion.
  • Specific examples of trichloromethyl 3_ triazine compounds, diazomethane compounds, and imidsulfonate compounds are described in JP-A Nos. 2 0 1 1 -2 2 1 4 9 4 paragraphs 0 0 8 3 to 0 8 8 8. The compounds described can be exemplified. ⁇ 2020/174767 34 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • oxime sulfonate compound those described in paragraphs ⁇ 804 to 088 of International Publication No. 2018/179648 can be preferably used.
  • the photo-acid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound and an oxime sulfonate compound, and preferably contains an oxime sulfonate compound. More preferred.
  • examples of preferable photoacid generators include photoacid generators having the following structures.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer may contain one type of photoacid generator alone, or may contain two or more types of photoacid generator.
  • the content of the photo-acid generator in the photosensitive resin composition layer is from 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition layer. Is preferable, and it is more preferable that the amount is from 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer may contain other additives, if necessary.
  • additives known additives may be used, and examples thereof include a plasticizer, a sensitizer, a heterocyclic compound, an alkoxysilane compound, a basic compound, an antisolent agent, and a surfactant. Can be mentioned.
  • plasticizer examples of the plasticizer, the sensitizer, the heterocyclic compound and the alkoxysilane compound are described in, for example, paragraphs 0 0 9 7 to 0 1 1 9 of International Publication No. 2018/17 9640.
  • the mentioned plasticizers, sensitizers, heterocyclic compounds and alkoxysilane compounds are mentioned. ⁇ 2020/174767 35 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer may contain a solvent.
  • the solvent may remain in the photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin composition layer is preferably 5% by mass or less, and more preferably 2% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition layer. It is more preferably 1% by mass or less.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer preferably contains a basic compound.
  • any of the basic compounds used in the chemically amplified resist can be selected and used.
  • the basic compound include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids.
  • Specific examples of the basic compound include compounds described in paragraphs 0 2 0 4 to 0 2 07 of JP 2 0 1 1 -2 2 1 4 9 4 JP, the contents of which are Incorporated herein.
  • 1 ⁇ 1-cyclohexyl-1 ⁇ 1'-[2-(4-morpholinyl)ethyl]thiourea (O IV! Ding II) can be preferably used.
  • a commercially available product of 1/1 / 11 it is manufactured by Toyo Kasei Can be mentioned.
  • a benzotriazole compound is preferable from the viewpoint of linearity of conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
  • the benzotriazole compound is not limited as long as it is a compound having a benzotriazole skeleton, and a known benzotriazole compound can be used.
  • benzotriazole compound examples include 1, 2, 3, 3-benzotriazole, 1 — [1 ⁇ 1, 1 ⁇ 1 _ bis(2-ethylhexyl)aminomethyl]benzotriazole, 5-carboxybenzotriazole, 1 — ( Hydroxymethyl) _ 1 ! _ Benzotriazole, 1 — Acetyl 1 !!
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer may contain one kind of basic compound,
  • It may contain two or more basic compounds.
  • the content of the basic compound is 0.0 with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • It is preferably from 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass, more preferably from 0.05% by mass to 3% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
  • surfactant examples include anionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, nonionic (nonionic) surfactants, and amphoteric surfactants.
  • a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
  • nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher surfactants. ⁇ 2020/174767 37 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • Examples include rutile ether-based surfactants, polyoxyethylene higher alkylphenyl ether-based surfactants, polyoxyethylene glycol higher fatty acid ester-based surfactants, silicone-based surfactants, and fluorine-based surfactants.
  • surfactant for example, the surfactants described in paragraphs 0120 to paragraph 0125 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be used. ..
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer may contain one kind of surfactant alone, or may contain two or more kinds of surfactant.
  • the content of the surfactant is 0.00 relative to the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer in the present disclosure includes, as additives other than the above, metal oxide particles, antioxidants, dispersants, acid proliferating agents, development accelerators, conductive fibers, colorants, It may contain known additives such as a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, a thickener, a crosslinking agent, and an organic or inorganic precipitation inhibitor.
  • the average thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer is preferably 0.5 to 20. When the thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer is 20 or less, the pattern is resolved. ⁇ 2020/174767 38 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the degree is more excellent, and is preferably 0.5 or more from the viewpoint of pattern linearity.
  • the average thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer is more preferably 0.8 to 15 and 1.0 to Particularly preferred is 100!
  • the average thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer is measured by a method according to the method for measuring the average thickness of the above polyimide substrate.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer can be formed by using a photosensitive resin composition containing a component used for forming the photosensitive resin composition layer and a solvent. It is also possible to prepare a composition by dissolving each component in a solvent in advance and then mixing the obtained solutions at a predetermined ratio.
  • the composition prepared as described above may be filtered using, for example, a filter having a pore size of 0.2 to 30.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer according to the present disclosure can be formed by applying the photosensitive resin composition onto a temporary support or a protective film and drying.
  • the coating method is not limited, and includes slit coating, spin coating, force-ten coating, and ink jet coating.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer may be formed on the intermediate layer or other layers described below formed on the temporary support or the protective film.
  • the solvent a known solvent can be used, and, for example, International Publication No. 20 18/1
  • the vapor pressure at 20 ° ⁇ described in paragraph 0 0 1 4 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 20 1 8 — 1 7 7 8 8 9 is 1
  • the following solvents can be preferably used.
  • solvent that can be used in the present disclosure one type may be used alone, or two types may be used in combination. ⁇ 2020/174767 39 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. More preferably, it is 100 to 900 parts by mass.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably has an intermediate layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the intermediate layer preferably contains a polymer.
  • a polymer water-soluble resin or alkali-soluble resin is preferable.
  • the water-soluble resin may further have alkali solubility.
  • the alkali-soluble resin may further have water solubility.
  • water-soluble means 1 to 17.0 of water at 22°C.
  • solubility in 9 is 0. 19 or more
  • alkali-soluble means that the solubility in a 1% by mass aqueous solution of sodium carbonate at 22 ° is 0.19 or more. Means there is.
  • the polymer has a solubility of 1 to 17.0 in water 109 at 22°
  • the water-soluble resin for example, cellulose resin, polyvinyl alcohol resin, polyvinylpyrrolidone resin, acrylic amide resin, (meth) acrylate resin, polyethylene oxide resin, gelatin, vinyl ether resin, polyamid Resin, and copolymers thereof.
  • the water-soluble resin is preferably a cellulose resin, and more preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropyl cellulose and hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose.
  • an alkali-soluble acrylic resin is preferable, and an acrylic resin having an acid group which may form a salt is more preferable.
  • the intermediate layer may contain one kind of polymer, or two or more kinds of polymers. ⁇ 2020/174767 40 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the content of the polymer is preferably 20% by mass to 100% by mass, and 50% by mass to 100% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer. More preferably, it is mass %.
  • the intermediate layer has a wavelength range during color development from the viewpoint of easy confirmation of the exposure pattern.
  • more, preferably contains 1 to 1 sensitive dye is more maximum absorption wavelength in the 1 to 1 changes.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength changes means that a dye in a colored state is decolored, a dye in a decolored state is colored, and a dye in a colored state is in a coloring state of another hue.
  • ⁇ 1-sensitive dye in terms of visibility, and more preferably by an acid generated from the photoacid generator is a potential dye is decolored.
  • the dye can be confirmed to be a 1 to 1 sensitive dye by the following method.
  • Add the hydrochloric acid aqueous solution of to adjust to 1 to 1 1.
  • 1 ⁇ 1 is 1 ⁇ 1 meter (model number: It is a value measured at 25 ° ⁇ using Toa D-Keke Co., Ltd.).
  • the method for measuring the maximum absorption wavelength in the present disclosure is to measure the maximum absorption wavelength in an atmosphere of atmospheric air using a spectrophotometer: II V3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 250 °.
  • the transmission spectrum shall be measured in the range of n ⁇ to 780!, and the wavelength at which the light intensity becomes minimum (maximum absorption wavelength) shall be measured.
  • Examples of dyes that are decolorized by exposure include leuco compounds, diphenylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes. ⁇ 2020/174767 41 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • Dyes Dyes, azomethine dyes, and anthraquinone dyes.
  • a leuco compound is preferable as the dye from the viewpoint of visibility.
  • leuco compounds examples include triarylmethane-based (eg, triphenylmethane-based), spiropyran-based, fluoran-based, diphenylmethane-based, mouth-daminelactam-based, indolylphthalide-based, leucoauramine-based leuco compounds. ..
  • leuco compounds having a triarylmethane skeleton that is, triarylmethane dyes
  • triphenylmethane dyes are more preferable.
  • the leuco compound is preferably a leuco compound having a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring, and having a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring opened or closed, and a sultone ring.
  • the sultone ring is a leuco compound that is closed and decolorized.
  • the dye is preferably a water-soluble compound for the purpose of preventing defects due to precipitation of the dye.
  • the dye preferably has a solubility of 1 to 17.0 in water 109 at 22° of 19 or more, and more preferably 59 or more.
  • the intermediate layer may contain one type of dye alone, or may contain two or more types of dye.
  • the content of the dye is preferably 0.01 mass% to 10 mass%, and 0.5 mass% to 5 mass% with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer. Is more preferable, and 1.0% by mass to 3.0% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the intermediate layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
  • a surfactant any of a surfactant having a fluorine atom, a surfactant having a silicon atom, and a surfactant having no fluorine atom and a silicon atom can be used.
  • the surfactant is a photosensitive resin composition. ⁇ 2020/174767 42 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • a surfactant having a fluorine atom is preferable, and a surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group and a polyalkyleneoxy group is preferable. Is more preferable.
  • any of anionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, nonionic (nonionic surfactants), and amphoteric surfactants can be used.
  • a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
  • the surfactant is preferably a surfactant having a solubility in water at 25 ° C of 109 of 19 or more.
  • the intermediate layer may contain one kind of surfactant alone, or may contain two or more kinds of surfactant.
  • the content of the surfactant in the intermediate layer is from the viewpoint of suppressing streak generation in the photosensitive resin composition layer and the intermediate layer, and the adhesiveness, based on the total mass of the intermediate layer: 0.05 % To 2.0% by mass is preferable, and 0.1% by mass to...! .
  • the content is ⁇ mass%, and it is particularly preferable that the content is 0.2 mass% to 0.5 mass%.
  • the intermediate layer can contain an inorganic filler.
  • the inorganic filler include silica particles, aluminum oxide particles, and zirconium oxide particles, and silica particles are more preferable. From the viewpoint of transparency, particles having a small particle size are preferable, and an inorganic filler having an average particle size of 100 n or less is more preferable. For example, if it is a commercially available product, Snowtex (registered trademark) is preferably used.
  • the volume fraction of the particles in the intermediate layer (volume ratio of particles in the intermediate layer) is 5% to 9% with respect to the total volume of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. It is preferably 0%, more preferably 10% to 80%, particularly preferably 20% to 60%.
  • the intermediate layer can contain a !-conditioning agent.
  • the middle layer contains !! ⁇ 2020/174767 43 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the coloring state or the decoloring state of the dye in the intermediate layer can be maintained more stably, and the adhesiveness between the photosensitive resin composition layer and the intermediate layer is further improved.
  • the [0193] 1 to 1 modifier for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, hydroxide lithium, organic amines, and organic ammonium salts.
  • 1-1 modifier from the viewpoint of water-soluble, is preferably sodium hydroxide.
  • the 1 to 1 adjusting agent is preferably an organic ammonium salt.
  • the average thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0. 3 111 to 10 from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the photosensitive resin composition layer and the intermediate layer, and the pattern forming property, and 0. 3 0 1 to 5 is preferable. More preferably, 0.30! to 20! is particularly preferable.
  • the average thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably thinner than the average thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the average thickness of the intermediate layer is measured according to the method for measuring the average thickness of the above-mentioned polyimide substrate.
  • the intermediate layer can have two or more layers.
  • the average thickness of each layer is not limited as long as it is within the above range, but of the two or more layers in the intermediate layer, the layer closest to the photosensitive resin composition layer is The average thickness is preferably 0.3 to 10 from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin composition layer, and the patterning property, and 0.3. Is more preferable, and 0.30! to 20! is particularly preferable.
  • the intermediate layer can be formed by using an intermediate layer forming composition containing a component used for forming the intermediate layer and a water-soluble solvent. It is also possible to prepare a composition by dissolving each component in a solvent in advance and then mixing the obtained solutions at a predetermined ratio. The composition thus prepared may be filtered using a filter having a pore size of 3.0.
  • the composition for forming an intermediate layer is applied to a temporary support and dried. ⁇ 2020/174767 44 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • an intermediate layer can be formed on the temporary support.
  • the coating method include slit coating, spin coating, pressure coating, and ink jet coating.
  • Examples of the water-soluble solvent include water and alcohols having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and preferably include water.
  • alcohols having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methanol, ethanol, _Propanol, Isopropanol, Examples include butanol, 11-pentanol, and-hexanol. Among the above, at least one selected from the group consisting of methanol, ethanol, 11-propanol, and isopropanol is preferable.
  • the photosensitive transfer material preferably has a protective film on the surface of the photosensitive transfer material opposite to the surface on which the temporary support is provided.
  • the protective film examples include a resin film and a paper, and a resin film is preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility.
  • the resin film examples include an ethylene film, a polypropylene film, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film.
  • the protective film is preferably a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, or a polyethylene terephthalate film.
  • the average thickness of the protective film is not limited, for example, 1 Is preferred.
  • the average thickness of the protective film is measured according to the method for measuring the average thickness of the above polyimide substrate.
  • the photosensitive transfer material may have a layer other than the above (hereinafter, also referred to as "other layer").
  • other layer examples include a contrast enhancement layer, a thermoplastic resin layer, and the like.
  • paragraphs 0 to 194 to 01996 of the No. 3 publication and the contents of this publication are incorporated in this specification.
  • FIG. 1 an example of the layer structure of the photosensitive transfer material is schematically shown.
  • the photosensitive transfer material 100 shown in Fig. 1 comprises a temporary support 12 and a transfer layer 14 formed by laminating a photosensitive resin composition layer 14_1 and an intermediate layer 14_2, and a protective film. 1 and 6 are laminated in this order.
  • the transfer layer 14 is a layer that is transferred (that is, laminated) on the polyimide substrate by undergoing the above-described bonding process.
  • the method for producing the photosensitive transfer material is not limited, and a known production method, for example, a known method for forming each layer can be used.
  • a method for producing the photosensitive transfer material a method including a step of applying a photosensitive resin composition on a temporary support and drying it to form a photosensitive resin composition layer is preferably exemplified.
  • the step of coating the intermediate layer-forming composition on a temporary support and drying the intermediate layer to form the intermediate layer, and the photosensitive resin composition on the intermediate layer is preferably exemplified.
  • Preferred is a method including a step of coating and drying to form a photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably further includes a step of providing a protective film on the photosensitive resin composition layer after the step of forming the photosensitive resin composition layer. ..
  • the method of manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure is not limited as long as it is a method of manufacturing a circuit board using a polyimide substrate having a conductive layer and applying the method of manufacturing a patterned substrate described above.
  • a method of manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure includes a step of manufacturing a patterned substrate by the method of manufacturing a patterned substrate (hereinafter, also referred to as a “substrate manufacturing step”), and the photosensitive resin in the patterned substrate. ⁇ 2020/174767 46 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • a step of etching the conductive layer exposed in the region where the pattern of the composition layer is not formed (hereinafter, also referred to as “etching step"), and removing the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer. It is preferable that the steps (hereinafter, also referred to as “removing step”) and are in this order. Since the circuit board manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes the above steps, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the line width of the circuit wiring due to the lapse of time after exposure, and it is excellent in the suitability for lamination under high temperature conditions.
  • the bonding step, the exposing step, the developing step, and the etching step described above are set as one set.
  • two or more conductive patterns different from each other can be formed.
  • the etching step, the exposure step is performed on the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer before the removal step,
  • a method of further performing the developing step By the above method, for example, two or more different conductive patterns can be formed.
  • the polyimide substrate can be reused (rework).
  • the solubility of the exposed areas is increased by using, for example, a photosensitizer that generates acid upon irradiation with the active rays. If neither the unexposed portion nor the unexposed portion is cured and the obtained pattern shape is defective, the substrate can be reused (reworked) by exposing the entire surface.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure preferably has a step of manufacturing a patterned board by the method for manufacturing a patterned board.
  • the polyimide substrate included in the patterned substrate has a conductive layer, ⁇ 2020/174767 47 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • a conductive layer on at least one surface.
  • the embodiment of the method for producing a patterned substrate and each material used in the above method is as described in the above section “Method for producing a substrate with a pattern”, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the method for producing a circuit board according to the present disclosure preferably has a step of etching the conductive layer exposed in a region where the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer is not formed in the / ⁇ turned substrate.
  • the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer (that is, the resin pattern) formed by the developing process is used as an etching resist to perform the etching treatment of the conductive layer. ..
  • the method of etching treatment is not limited and known methods can be applied.
  • Examples of the etching method include, for example, the method described in paragraphs ⁇ ⁇ 48 to paragraph 0 0 5 4 of JP-A No. 2010-1515 2155, and known plasma etching.
  • the dry etching method may be used.
  • etching treatment for example, a generally used wet etching method of immersing in an etching liquid can be mentioned.
  • etching solution used for wet etching an acidic type or alkaline type etching solution may be appropriately selected according to the object of etching.
  • the acidic type etching solution examples include an aqueous solution containing only an acidic component such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid and phosphoric acid, and an acidic component and a salt such as ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride and potassium permanganate.
  • an acidic component such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid and phosphoric acid
  • an acidic component and a salt such as ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride and potassium permanganate.
  • a mixed aqueous solution is exemplified.
  • the acidic component a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
  • an aqueous solution of an alkali component alone such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, an organic amine, a salt of an organic amine such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, or an alkaline solution and an alkaline solution.
  • an alkaline solution and an alkaline solution examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution with a salt such as potassium manganate.
  • the temperature of the etching solution is not limited, but it is preferably 45° or less.
  • the resin pattern used as an etching mask (etching pattern) in the present disclosure preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45° or lower. Therefore, the photosensitive resin composition layer is prevented from peeling off during the etching process, and the portion where the photosensitive resin composition layer does not exist is selectively etched. After the etching process, in order to prevent contamination of the process line, a cleaning process of cleaning the etched substrate and a drying process of drying the cleaned substrate may be performed, if necessary.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure preferably has a step of removing the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the removing step is not particularly limited and may be performed as necessary, but is preferably performed after the etching step.
  • the method of removing the remaining photosensitive resin composition layer is not particularly limited, but a method of removing it by a chemical treatment can be mentioned, and it is particularly preferable to use a removing solution.
  • the photosensitive resin composition is preferably added to the removing solution under stirring at 30° to 80°, more preferably 50° to 80°.
  • a method of immersing a substrate having layers and the like for 1 to 30 minutes can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the removing liquid include inorganic alkali components such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, or primary amine compounds, secondary amine compounds, tertiary amine compounds, and quaternary ammonium salts.
  • Examples of the removal solution include an organic alkaline component such as a compound dissolved in water, dimethylsulfoxide, 1 ⁇ 1_methylpyrrolidone, or a mixed solution thereof.
  • a removing solution may be used to remove the particles by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like. ⁇ 2020/174767 49 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure includes a step of exposing the entire surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer between the etching step (etching step) and the removing step (removing step) (hereinafter, referred to as “ It is also referred to as “entire surface exposure step”).
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure has a step of heating the whole surface-exposed photosensitive resin composition layer (hereinafter, also referred to as "heating step"), if necessary. May be.
  • the whole surface exposure step and the heating step are preferably performed after the etching step and before the removing step.
  • the heating step can further improve the reaction rate of the photo-acid generator and the reaction rate of the generated acid and the photosensitive resin, and as a result, the removal performance is improved.
  • the light source used for the exposure in the overall exposure step is not limited, and a known exposure light source can be used. From the viewpoint of removability, it is preferable to use a light source containing light having the same wavelength as that in the exposure step.
  • the exposure amount in the whole surface exposure step is 5"/ ⁇ 2 ⁇ 1,
  • the exposure amount in the whole surface exposure step is preferably equal to or more than the exposure amount in the above exposure step, and more preferably more than the exposure amount in the above exposure step.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure may include steps (hereinafter, also referred to as “other steps”) other than the above.
  • Other steps include, for example: ⁇ 2020/174767 50 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the exposure step the development step, and other steps in the present disclosure, those described in paragraphs 0 0 3 5 to 0 0 5 1 of JP-A No.
  • the method can be preferably used in the present disclosure.
  • the method for producing a circuit board according to the present disclosure preferably has a step of peeling the protective film of the photosensitive transfer material.
  • the method for peeling off the protective film is not limited, and a known method can be applied.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure can include a step of reducing the visible light reflectance of part or all of the conductive layer on the polyimide board.
  • Examples of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include oxidation treatment.
  • visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening by converting copper into copper oxide by an oxidation treatment.
  • paragraphs 0 0 1 7 to 0 0 2 5 of JP-A 2 0 1 4-1 5 0 1 1 8 gazette, and JP 2 0 1 3 1 -Paragraph 0 0 4 1, Paragraph 0 0 4 2, Paragraph 0 0 4 8 and Paragraph 0 0 58 of Publication No. 2 0 6 3 15 are described, and the contents of this publication are incorporated into this specification. ..
  • a method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure is provided on a conductive pattern formed on a polyimide substrate. It is also preferable to have a step of forming an insulating film and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film.
  • a new conductive layer can be formed while being insulated from the conductive pattern previously formed.
  • the step of forming the insulating film is not limited, and a known method of forming a permanent film can be used.
  • photolithography ⁇ 2020/174767 51 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • An insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by roughing.
  • the step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film is not limited, and a new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity. ..
  • a method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure uses a polyimide substrate having a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces, and sequentially applies the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the polyimide substrate.
  • the above configuration it is the child form _ square of the _ conductive pattern on the surface, and the second conductive pattern touch panel circuit wiring formed of the other surface of the polyimide substrate.
  • the circuit board manufactured by the circuit board manufacturing method according to the present disclosure can be applied to various devices.
  • An example of a device provided with a circuit board manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure is an input device, which is preferably a touch panel, and more preferably a capacitive touch panel. Yes.
  • the input device can be applied to a display device such as an organic display device, a liquid crystal display device, or the like.
  • One embodiment of the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes the circuit board manufacturing method.
  • Another embodiment of the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure has a step of preparing a circuit board manufactured by the circuit board manufacturing method.
  • the touch panel is manufactured using the circuit board manufactured by the circuit board according to the present disclosure.
  • the manufacturing method of the touch panel can be referred to.
  • touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may have any process (other process) other than the above matters.
  • FIG. 1 An example of a mask pattern used in the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is shown in Figs.
  • SL and G are non-image areas (light-shielding areas), and DL is a virtual frame for alignment.
  • circuit wiring having a pattern corresponding to SL and G is formed.
  • Touch panel can be manufactured. Specifically, it can be prepared by the method described in FIG. 1 of WO2016/0 1 90405.
  • G is a portion where a transparent electrode (touch panel electrode) is formed
  • S L is a portion where the wiring of the peripheral extraction portion is formed.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel that includes at least a circuit board manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure. Further, the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably has at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
  • the detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure may be any known method such as a resistance film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method.
  • the capacitance method is preferable.
  • in-cell type for example, those shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of Japanese Patent Publication No. 201 2 -5 1 705 1
  • on-cell type for example, JP No. 201 3-1 681 25 shown in FIG. 19 of JP, JP-A No. 201-89 102 shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 5
  • the laminate according to the present disclosure has a polyimide substrate and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher. Since the laminate according to the present disclosure has the above-mentioned configuration, when the laminate according to the present disclosure is exposed, it is possible to suppress excessive diffusion of an acid in the photosensitive resin composition layer after exposure. The excessive acid decomposition reaction of the material layer can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after the exposure.
  • the embodiments of the polyimide substrate and the photosensitive resin composition layer are as described in the above "Method for producing a patterned substrate", and the preferred embodiments are also the same. is there.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer is preferably a layer formed by transfer.
  • the layer formed by transfer can be formed by a method using a photosensitive transfer material described later (that is, a method of bonding the photosensitive transfer material and a polyimide substrate).
  • the laminate according to the present disclosure includes a polyimide substrate, a conductive layer, and an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C or higher. It is preferable to have a photosensitive resin composition layer to be contained in this order.
  • the method for producing a laminated body according to the present disclosure is not limited, and examples thereof include a method for producing a laminated body by the "bonding step" described in the above "Method for producing a substrate with a pattern". .. That is, the above-mentioned photosensitive resin composition in a photosensitive transfer material, comprising: a temporary support; and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature (Cho 9) of 50° or more.
  • the layered product according to the present disclosure can be manufactured by bringing the layer and the polyimide substrate into contact with each other and bonding the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate together. Further, the laminate according to the present disclosure may be manufactured by applying the above-mentioned photosensitive resin composition onto a polyimide substrate. ⁇ 0 2020/174 767 54 ?(: 17 2019/044334
  • Methyl methacrylate manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., a methacrylate compound having a linear alkyl group at the ester position
  • Methacrylic acid (86.1 parts by mass, 1.0 molar equivalent) in 3 flasks, and ⁇ 2020/174767 55 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • Acrylic acid (72.1 parts by mass, ...!.0 molar equivalent) and hexane (72.1 parts by mass) were added to the three flasks and cooled to 20°.
  • Polymer 2 to polymer were prepared in the same manner as polymer 8_1, except that the type and amount of monomer used were changed according to Table 1 below. A solution containing 11 was obtained. The solid content concentration in the solution was 40.0% by mass.
  • “monomer” means a monomer forming a constituent unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
  • “monomer” means a monomer forming a structural unit other than a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
  • “one” means that the corresponding monomer was not used.
  • the glass transition temperature (Table 9), acid value, and weight average molecular weight listed in Table 1 was measured by the method described above.
  • a solution containing each polymer (_ 1 to _ 11), a photo-acid generator, a basic compound, and a surfactant were weighed so as to have a solid content mass ratio shown in Table 2 below, and then the above-mentioned components And propyl acetate were dissolved and mixed to obtain a mixed solution having a solid content concentration of 10% by mass.
  • a photosensitive resin composition composition for photosensitive transfer material
  • the photosensitive resin composition was applied as a temporary support onto a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 30 using a slit-shaped nozzle so that the dry film thickness was 4.0.
  • a photosensitive resin composition layer was formed on the temporary support by passing through a drying zone having an average temperature of 85° for 50 seconds.
  • a polyethylene film made by Tredegar, By pressure-bonding onto the photosensitive resin composition layer, the photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 1 to 12 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 were produced.
  • a substrate with a copper layer was produced by stacking the layers.
  • the area (%) is 95% or more, and the photosensitive resin composition layer is not cracked: 5
  • Each of the prepared photosensitive transfer materials had a mouth temperature of 1300 ° (:, linear pressure ⁇ . ⁇ 2020/174767 59 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • the resolution was evaluated according to the following criteria: The evaluation results are shown in Table 2. The smaller the ultimate resolution, the better the resolution even when left after exposure. It can be said that an excellent pattern can be obtained.
  • the ultimate resolution is less than 8 and more than 60!: 4.5
  • the ultimate resolution is less than 10 and is 8 or more: 4
  • the ultimate resolution is less than 15 and greater than or equal to 10: 3
  • the ultimate resolution is less than 200! and 15 or more: 2
  • the ultimate resolution is 20 or more: 1
  • Each of the prepared photosensitive transfer materials had a mouth temperature of 1300 ° (:, linear pressure ⁇ . And was laminated on a substrate with a copper layer under a lamination condition of linear velocity of 3.0! Line-and-space pattern with a line width of 6 without peeling the temporary support (0 litho ratio 1:1) Through the mask, the photosensitive resin composition layer was exposed with the exposure amount obtained by the sensitivity evaluation using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp. After the exposure, it was left for 3 hours, and allowed to stand for 24 hours, and then the temporary support was peeled off and developed. The development was carried out by using a 1.0% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 22 ° and shower development for 40 seconds. Got this way ⁇ 2020/174767 60 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • a substrate with a line and space pattern was obtained.
  • the pattern width after 3 hours and the pattern width after 24 hours in 6 patterns (resin pattern) on the substrate were obtained.
  • the change rate of the pattern width after 24 hours with respect to the pattern width after 3 hours was obtained according to the following formula.
  • the change rate of the pattern width was evaluated according to the following criteria. Table 2 shows the evaluation results. It can be said that the smaller the value of the rate of change is, the more the decrease in line width due to the passage of time after exposure is suppressed, and that the performance is stable.
  • Pattern width change rate (%) ⁇ [2 4 hours later pattern width ()] / [3 hours later pattern width () ] ⁇ X I 0 0
  • Each of the prepared photosensitive transfer materials had a mouth temperature of 1300 ° (:, linear pressure ⁇ . And was laminated on a substrate with a copper layer under a lamination condition of linear velocity of 3.0! Exposure of the photosensitive resin composition layer obtained by sensitivity evaluation using a super high pressure mercury lamp through a line and space pattern with a line width of 6 (0 lithographic ratio 1:1) without peeling off the temporary support. After exposure for 3 hours, the film was allowed to stand for 3 hours and then for 24 hours, and then the temporary support was peeled off and developed. The development was carried out by shower development using a 1.0% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 220 ° C for 40 seconds. The line-and-space pattern obtained in this way was obtained.
  • the copper layer was etched using a copper etching solution (Kanryo Kagaku Co., Ltd., Oley 02) to obtain a substrate drawn with copper (solid line portion 3!_).
  • the copper line width after 3 hours and the copper line width after 24 hours in the 6 patterns (copper pattern) on the above substrate were obtained, respectively.
  • the rate of change of the copper line width after 24 hours with respect to the copper line width after 3 hours was calculated according to the following formula. Based on the obtained rate of change of the copper line width, the rate of change of the copper line width was evaluated according to the following criteria. Table 2 shows the evaluation results. The smaller the rate of change value, the more ⁇ 2020/174767 61 ⁇ (:171?2019/044334
  • Copper wire width change rate (%) ⁇ [Copper wire width after 24 hours ()] / [Copper wire width after 3 hours ()] ⁇ X 1 0 0
  • Luminance was evaluated as one index of display characteristics.
  • a second conductive layer, indium tin oxide (chome), layer (thickness 150 m) is formed by sputtering. and, then, by forming a copper layer (thickness 2 0 0 n m) in a vacuum vapor deposition method as the conductive layer of the first layer on the ⁇ Ding ⁇ layer, to prepare a board.
  • Each of the prepared photosensitive transfer materials was bonded onto the copper layer (linear pressure ⁇ .
  • the solid line part 3!_ and the gray part o are light-shielding parts, and the dotted line part !_ is a virtual alignment alignment frame.
  • the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain the pattern shown in FIG.
  • a copper etching solution Kanto Kagaku Co., Ltd. 0 Lee 02
  • a copper etching solution Kanto Kagaku Co., Ltd. 012
  • a substrate was obtained in which both copper (solid line 3!_) and sushi (gray part) were drawn in the pattern shown in Fig. 2.
  • the gray area ⁇ is a light-shielding area and the dotted line area 0!_ is a virtual illustration of the alignment frame.
  • the copper layer was etched by using LY 02, and the remaining photosensitive resin composition layer was peeled off by using a stripping solution (Kanto Kagaku Co., Ltd. ⁇ 1301) to obtain a circuit board. ..
  • the resulting circuit board was irradiated with a fluorescent lamp from the back side (the wavelength range 3 8 0 ⁇ 7 8 0 n m ), transmitted light intensity luminance meter -!!! 3 _ 1 0 0 (IV ⁇ 1 ⁇ !_Ding Co., Ltd.).
  • the light intensity when the circuit board is not sandwiched that is, the intensity of the light emitted from the fluorescent lamp
  • the light intensity when the circuit board is sandwiched that is, the intensity of the light transmitted through the circuit board
  • the brightness retention rate was calculated according to the following formula.
  • the display characteristics were evaluated according to the following criteria. Table 2 shows the evaluation results. The larger the value of the luminance maintenance factor, the better the display characteristics of the display device when the obtained circuit board is provided in the display device.
  • Brightness maintenance ratio (%) [Light intensity/Light intensity 8] X 1 0 0
  • Mi_2 a compound having the structure shown below (trade name: 8 1 0 3, manufactured by Mihachi 3)
  • Lumirror registered trademark
  • 1 60360 Toray Industries, Inc., haze 0.4%, total light transmittance 90%, thickness 16 ⁇
  • Examples 1 to 12 had a smaller change rate of the pattern width and the copper line width than Comparative Examples 1 to 2 and were excellent in laminate suitability under high temperature and high speed conditions. .. Further, it was found that Examples 1 to 10 using Polyimide 1 having a small haze and a high total light transmittance have excellent display characteristics as compared with Examples 11 to 12.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Photosensitive Polymer And Photoresist Processing (AREA)
  • Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a pattern-added substrate manufacturing method and an application for same, the manufacturing method including a step for bringing a photosensitive resin composition layer that contains an acid decomposable resin the glass transition temperature of which is 50℃ or higher in a photosensitive transfer material comprising a temporary support and the photosensitive resin composition layer into contact with a polyimide substrate and pasting the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate together.

Description

\¥0 2020/174767 1 ?€1/^2019/044334 \¥0 2020/174767 1 ?€1/^2019/044334
明 細 書 Specification
発明の名称 : Title of invention:
パターンつき基板の製造方法、 回路基板の製造方法、 タッチパネルの製造 方法、 及び積層体 Method for manufacturing patterned substrate, method for manufacturing circuit board, method for manufacturing touch panel, and laminated body
技術分野 Technical field
[0001 ] 本開示は、 パターンつき基板の製造方法、 回路基板の製造方法、 タッチパ ネルの製造方法、 及び積層体に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a method for manufacturing a patterned substrate, a method for manufacturing a circuit board, a method for manufacturing a touch panel, and a laminate.
背景技術 Background technology
[0002] 金属配線等の導電性パターンを形成する技術は、 例えば、 タッチパネルの 製造、 及びプリント配線基板の製造において広く利用されている。 [0002] A technique for forming a conductive pattern such as a metal wiring is widely used, for example, in manufacturing a touch panel and in manufacturing a printed wiring board.
[0003] 静電容量型入力装置等のタッチパネルを備えた表示装置 (例えば、 有機エ レクトロルミネッセンス (巳 !_) 表示装置、 及び液晶表示装置) においては 、 タッチパネル内部に種々の導電性パターンが設けられている。 導電性バタ —ンとしては、 例えば、 視認部のセンサーに相当する電極バターン、 周辺配 線、 及び取り出し配線が挙げられる。 導電性パターンの形成においては、 エ 程数が少ないといった理由から、 例えば、 感光性転写材料を基板に貼り合わ せた後、 パターン露光、 現像、 及びエッチングを経て所望のパターンを形成 する技術が利用可能である (例えば、 特開 2 0 1 7 - 1 5 6 7 3 5号公報参 照) 。 [0003] In a display device having a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device (for example, an organic electroluminescence (M!!) display device and a liquid crystal display device), various conductive patterns are provided inside the touch panel. Has been. Examples of the conductive pattern include an electrode pattern corresponding to the sensor of the visual recognition portion, peripheral wiring, and extraction wiring. In forming conductive patterns, because of the small number of processes, for example, a technique of forming a desired pattern through pattern exposure, development, and etching after applying a photosensitive transfer material to a substrate is used. It is possible (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 20 1 7-1 5 6 7 3 5).
[0004] タッチパネルにおいて導電性パターンが形成される基板としては、 視認性 の観点から、 通常、 ポリエチレンテレフタレート ( 巳丁) フイルム等が使 用される。 As a substrate on which a conductive pattern is formed in a touch panel, polyethylene terephthalate (Mending) film or the like is usually used from the viewpoint of visibility.
[0005] 一方、 プリント配線基板においては、 芳香族ポリイミ ド系フイルム等の耐 熱性絶縁フイルムが使用される (例えば、 特開 2 0 0 6 _ 2 1 2 8 0 2号公 報参照) 。 On the other hand, in a printed wiring board, a heat resistant insulating film such as an aromatic polyimide film is used (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 20000_2 1 2 8 0 2).
発明の概要 Summary of the invention
発明が解決しようとする課題 〇 2020/174767 2 卩(:171?2019/044334 Problems to be Solved by the Invention 〇 2020/174767 2 (:171?2019/044334
[0006] しかしながら、 例えば、 特開 2 0 1 7 - 1 5 6 7 3 5号公報に記載された 感光性転写材料のような、 ガラス転移温度の低い重合体を含有する感光性樹 脂組成物層を有する感光性転写材料を用いて、 基板上にパターンを形成する 場合には、 基板を露光工程から次工程 (例えば、 現像工程) まで放置させた 際に、 露光工程から次工程までの時間経過に伴い、 得られるパターンの線幅 が減少するという問題が起こる場合がある。 この問題を 巳 0 ( 〇 3 I
Figure imgf000004_0001
0 6 I )/ ') ともいつ〇
[0006] However, for example, a photosensitive resin composition containing a polymer having a low glass transition temperature, such as the photosensitive transfer material described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 20 1 715 6 7 35 When a pattern is formed on a substrate using a photosensitive transfer material having a layer, the time from the exposure process to the next process can be set when the substrate is allowed to stand from the exposure process to the next process (eg, development process). There may be a problem that the line width of the obtained pattern decreases with the passage of time. To solve this problem,
Figure imgf000004_0001
0 6 I )/ ' ) with when 〇
[0007] さらに、 従来の感光性転写材料及び基板を高温で貼り合わせると、 例えば 、 感光性転写材料と基板との密着性の低下、 及び基板の変形 (例えば、 伸び 、 及びシワ) が起こる場合がある。 上記した問題は、 特に、 口ールツーロー ル ([^〇 丨 丨 I 〇 [^〇 丨 丨) 方式によって感光性転写材料及び基板を貼 り合わせる際に生じる傾向がある。 [0007] Furthermore, when the conventional photosensitive transfer material and the substrate are bonded at high temperature, for example, the adhesion between the photosensitive transfer material and the substrate is deteriorated, and the substrate is deformed (for example, elongation and wrinkle). There is. The above-mentioned problems tend to occur particularly when the photosensitive transfer material and the substrate are bonded together by the mouth-to-roll ([^ 〇 丨 I 〇 [^ 〇 丨)) method.
[0008] しかも、 例えば、 特開 2 0 0 6 - 2 1 2 8 0 2号公報に記載された従来の ポリイミ ドフィルムは、 着色しているため、 タッチパネルを備えた表示装置 に適用することが困難であると考えられる。 このため、 上記ポリイミ ドフィ ルムは、 タッチパネルにおいて用いられるパターン形成用の基板として検討 されていなかった。 [0008] Moreover, for example, the conventional polyimide film described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2000-212128 is colored, and therefore can be applied to a display device having a touch panel. Considered difficult. Therefore, the above-mentioned polyimide film has not been studied as a substrate for pattern formation used in a touch panel.
[0009] 本開示は、 上記の事情に鑑みてなされたものである。 [0009] The present disclosure has been made in view of the above circumstances.
本開示の一態様は、 露光後の時間経過によるパターンの線幅の減少を抑制 でき、 かつ、 高温条件下でのラミネート適性に優れるパターンつき基板の製 造方法を提供することを目的とする。 An aspect of the present disclosure is to provide a method for producing a patterned substrate that can suppress a decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after exposure and that has excellent laminate suitability under high temperature conditions.
本開示の他の一態様は、 露光後の時間経過による回路配線の線幅の減少を 抑制でき、 かつ、 高温条件下でのラミネート適性に優れる回路基板の製造方 法を提供することを目的とする。 Another aspect of the present disclosure is to provide a method for manufacturing a circuit board that can suppress a decrease in the line width of circuit wiring due to the passage of time after exposure and that is excellent in laminate suitability under high temperature conditions. To do.
本開示の他の一態様は、 上記回路基板の製造方法を含むタッチパネルの製 造方法を提供することを目的とする。 Another aspect of the present disclosure is to provide a method for manufacturing a touch panel including the method for manufacturing a circuit board.
本開示の他の一態様は、 上記回路基板の製造方法により製造される回路基 板を用いたタッチパネルの製造方法を提供することを目的とする。 〇 2020/174767 3 卩(:171?2019/044334 Another aspect of the present disclosure is to provide a method for manufacturing a touch panel using a circuit board manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit board. 〇 2020/174767 3 卩 (:171?2019/044334
本開示の他の一態様は、 露光後の時間経過によるパターンの線幅の減少を 抑制できる積層体を提供することを目的とする。 Another aspect of the present disclosure is to provide a laminate capable of suppressing a decrease in the line width of a pattern due to the passage of time after exposure.
課題を解決するための手段 Means for solving the problem
[0010] 上記課題を解決するための手段には、 以下の態様が含まれる。 Means for solving the above problems include the following modes.
<1 > 仮支持体と、 ガラス転移温度が 50°〇以上である酸分解性樹脂を含 有する感光性樹脂組成物層と、 を有する感光性転写材料における上記感光性 樹脂組成物層、 及びポリイミ ド基板を接触させて、 上記感光性転写材料と上 記ポリイミ ド基板とを貼り合わせる工程を有するパターンつき基板の製造方 法。 <1> The above-mentioned photosensitive resin composition layer in a photosensitive transfer material comprising a temporary support and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° or higher, and a polyimide. A method for producing a patterned substrate, which comprises a step of bringing the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer material and the above-mentioned polyimide substrate into contact with each other by bringing the printed substrate into contact with each other.
<2> 上記酸分解性樹脂のガラス転移温度が 50°〇〜90°〇であり、 上記 感光性転写材料と上記ポリイミ ド基板とを貼り合わせる工程において、 加熱 温度が 1 20°〇~ 1 50°〇であり、 かつ、 搬送速度が、 2. 5 /分〜 5. <2> The glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is 50° to 90° and the heating temperature is 120° to 150° in the process of bonding the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate. ° 〇 and the transfer speed is 2.5 / min ~ 5.
0 /分である < 1 >に記載のパターンつき基板の製造方法。 The method for producing a patterned substrate according to <1>, which is 0 / min.
<3> 上記酸分解性樹脂のガラス転移温度が 55°〇〜90°〇である < 1 > 又は < 2 >に記載のパターンつき基板の製造方法。 <3> The method for producing a patterned substrate according to <1> or <2>, wherein the acid-decomposable resin has a glass transition temperature of 55° to 90°.
< 4 > 上記酸分解性樹脂の酸価が、
Figure imgf000005_0001
<4> The acid value of the acid-decomposable resin is
Figure imgf000005_0001
9である < 1 >~<3>のいずれか 1つに記載のパターンつき基板の製造方 法。 9. A method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to any one of <1> to <3>.
<5> 上記酸分解性樹脂が、 炭素数 1〜 3の直鎖状アルキル基をエステル 位に有する (メタ) アクリレート化合物、 炭素数 1〜 3の分岐状アルキル基 をエステル位に有する (メタ) アクリレート化合物、 炭素数 4〜 20の環状 アルキル基をエステル位に有する (メタ) アクリレート化合物、 及び炭素数 4〜 20の環状エーテル基をエステル位に有する (メタ) アクリレート化合 物よりなる群から選択される少なくとも 1種の (メタ) アクリレート化合物 由来の構成単位を上記酸分解性樹脂の全質量に対して 90質量%以上含み、 かつ、 アクリル酸、 及びアクリレート化合物よりなる群から選択される少な くとも 1種のアクリル化合物由来の構成単位を上記酸分解性樹脂の全質量に 対して 0質量%〜 30質量%含む < 1 >〜<4>のいずれか1つに記載のパ 020/174767 4 卩(:171?2019/044334 <5> The acid-decomposable resin has a linear alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position (meth)acrylate compound, and has a branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position (meth) An acrylate compound, a (meth)acrylate compound having a cyclic alkyl group having a carbon number of 4 to 20 at the ester position, and a (meth)acrylate compound having a cyclic ether group having a carbon number of 4 to 20 at the ester position. 90% by mass or more of the structural unit derived from at least one (meth) acrylate compound based on the total mass of the acid-decomposable resin, and at least selected from the group consisting of acrylic acid and an acrylate compound. The composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, containing 0% by mass to 30% by mass of the total amount of the acid-decomposable resin containing one acrylic compound-derived structural unit 020/174767 4 卩 (: 171?2019/044334
ターンつき基板の製造方法。 A method of manufacturing a substrate with turns.
<6> 上記ポリイミ ド基板のヘイズが、 〇. 5 %以下である< 1>〜<5 >のいずれか 1つに記載のパターンつき基板の製造方法。 <6> The method for producing a patterned substrate according to any one of <1> to <5>, in which the haze of the polyimide substrate is 0.5% or less.
< 7> 上記ポリイミ ド基板の全光透過率が、 8 5 %以上である< 1>〜< 6>のいずれか 1つに記載のパターンつき基板の製造方法。 <7> The method for producing a patterned substrate according to any one of <1> to <6>, in which the total light transmittance of the polyimide substrate is 85% or more.
< 8> 上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性樹脂組成物層をパターン露光 する工程と、 上記/《ターン露光された感光性樹脂組成物層を現像して感光性 樹脂組成物層のパターンを形成する工程と、 を有する<1>〜<7>のいず れか 1つに記載のパターンつき基板の製造方法。 <8> A step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer after the step of laminating, and a step of developing the photosensitive resin composition layer subjected to the above/<<turn exposure to form a pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer. The method for producing a patterned substrate according to any one of <1> to <7>, including the step of:
<9> 上記ポリイミ ド基板が、 導電性層を有する<1>〜<8>のいずれ か 1つに記載のパターンつき基板の製造方法。 <9> The method for producing a patterned substrate according to any one of <1> to <8>, in which the polyimide substrate has a conductive layer.
<1 〇> <9>に記載のパターンつき基板の製造方法によりパターンつき 基板を製造する工程と、 上記パターンつき基板において上記感光性樹脂組成 物層のパターンが形成されていない領域に露出する上記導電性層をエッチン グする工程と、 上記感光性樹脂組成物層のパターンを除去する工程と、 をこ の順で有する回路基板の製造方法。 <1 0> A step of producing a patterned substrate by the method for producing a patterned substrate according to <9>, and exposing the patterned substrate to a region of the photosensitive resin composition layer where the pattern is not formed. A method for manufacturing a circuit board, comprising: a step of etching a conductive layer; and a step of removing the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer, in this order.
< 1 1> 上記エッチングする工程と上記除去する工程との間に、 上記感光 性樹脂組成物層を全面露光する工程を有する< 1 〇>に記載の回路基板の製 造方法。 <11> The method for producing a circuit board according to <10>, which has a step of exposing the entire surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer between the etching step and the removing step.
< 1 2> 上記導電性層が、 銅層、 又は銀層である<1 0>又は<1 1>に 記載の回路基板の製造方法。 <12> The method for producing a circuit board according to <10> or <11>, wherein the conductive layer is a copper layer or a silver layer.
<1 3> <1 0>〜<1 2>のいずれか 1つに記載の回路基板の製造方法 を含むタッチパネルの製造方法。 <13> A method for manufacturing a touch panel, including the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to any one of <10> to <12>.
<1 4> <1 0>〜<1 2>のいずれか 1つに記載の回路基板の製造方法 により製造された回路基板を準備する工程を有するタッチパネルの製造方法 <14> A touch panel manufacturing method including a step of preparing a circuit board manufactured by the circuit board manufacturing method according to any one of <10> to <12>.
< 1 5> ポリイミ ド基板と、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上である酸分解性 樹脂を含有する感光性樹脂組成物層と、 を有する積層体。 〇 2020/174767 5 卩(:171?2019/044334 発明の効果 <15> A laminate comprising a polyimide substrate and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50° or higher. 〇 2020/174767 5 ((171?2019/044334)
[001 1] 本開示の一態様によれば、 露光後の時間経過によるパターンの線幅の減少 を抑制でき、 かつ、 高温条件下でのラミネート適性に優れるパターンつき基 板の製造方法を提供することができる。 [001 1] According to one embodiment of the present disclosure, there is provided a method for producing a patterned substrate, which can suppress a decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after exposure and which is excellent in laminating suitability under high temperature conditions. be able to.
本開示の他の一態様によれば、 露光後の時間経過による回路配線の線幅の 減少を抑制でき、 かつ、 高温条件下でのラミネート適性に優れる回路基板の 製造方法を提供することができる。 According to another aspect of the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a circuit board that can suppress a decrease in the line width of circuit wiring due to the passage of time after exposure and that is excellent in laminate suitability under high temperature conditions. ..
本開示の他の一態様によれば、 上記回路基板の製造方法を含むタッチパネ ルの製造方法を提供することができる。 According to another aspect of the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a touch panel including the method for manufacturing the circuit board.
本開示の他の一態様によれば、 上記回路基板の製造方法により製造される 回路基板を用いたタッチパネルの製造方法を提供することができる。 According to another aspect of the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a touch panel using a circuit board manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit board described above.
本開示の他の一態様によれば、 露光後の時間経過によるパターンの線幅の 減少を抑制できる積層体を提供することができる。 According to another aspect of the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a laminate capable of suppressing a decrease in the line width of a pattern due to the passage of time after exposure.
図面の簡単な説明 Brief description of the drawings
[0012] [図 1]図 1は、 本開示に係る感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を示す概略図であ る。 [0012] [FIG. 1] FIG. 1 is a schematic view showing an example of a layer structure of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
[図 2]図 2は、 バターンの一例を示す概略図である。 [Fig. 2] Fig. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of a pattern.
[図 3]図 3は、 バターンの一例を示す概略図である。 [FIG. 3] FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing an example of a pattern.
発明を実施するための形態 MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
[0013] 以下、 本開示の実施形態について詳細に説明する。 なお、 本開示は、 以下 の実施形態に何ら制限されず、 本開示の目的の範囲内において、 適宜変更を 加えて実施することができる。 [0013] Hereinafter, embodiments of the present disclosure will be described in detail. It should be noted that the present disclosure is not limited to the following embodiments and can be implemented with appropriate modifications within the scope of the object of the present disclosure.
[0014] 本開示において、 「〜」 を用いて表される数値範囲は、 「〜」 の前後に記 載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。 本開示に段階 的に記載されている数値範囲において、 ある数値範囲で記載された上限値又 は下限値は、 他の段階的な記載の数値範囲の上限値又は下限値に置き換えて もよい。 また、 本開示に記載されている数値範囲において、 ある数値範囲で 記載された上限値又は下限値は、 実施例に示されている値に置き換えてもよ 〇 2020/174767 6 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0014] In the present disclosure, the numerical range represented by using "to" means a range including the numerical values described before and after "to" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value. In the numerical ranges described stepwise in the present disclosure, the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the upper limit value or the lower limit value of another stepwise described numerical range. Further, in the numerical range described in the present disclosure, the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the value shown in the examples. 〇 2020/174767 6 卩 (: 171?2019/044334
い。 Yes.
本開示において、 「 (メタ) アクリル」 とは、 アクリル及びメタクリルの 双方、 又は、 いずれか一方を意味し、 「 (メタ) アクリ レート」 とは、 アク リ レート及びメタクリ レートの双方、 又は、 いずれか一方を意味する。 本開示において、 組成物中の各成分の量は、 組成物中に各成分に該当する 物質が複数存在する場合、 特に断らない限り、 組成物中に存在する複数の物 質の合計量を意味する。 In the present disclosure, “(meth)acrylic” means both and/or one of acrylic and methacrylic, and “(meth)acrylate” means both acrylate and methacrylate, or either. Means either side. In the present disclosure, the amount of each component in the composition means the total amount of the plurality of substances present in the composition, unless there is a plurality of substances corresponding to each component in the composition, unless otherwise specified. To do.
本開示において、 「工程」 との用語には、 独立した工程だけでなく、 他の 工程と明確に区別できない場合であつても工程の所期の目的が達成されれば 、 本用語に含まれる。 In the present disclosure, the term “process” is included in this term as long as the intended purpose of the process is achieved not only as an independent process but also when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. ..
本開示における基 (原子団) の表記において、 置換及び無置換を記してい ない表記は、 置換基を有しないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含する ものである。 例えば 「アルキル基」 とは、 置換基を有さないアルキル基 (無 置換アルキル基) のみならず、 置換基を有するアルキル基 (置換アルキル基 ) をも包含するものである。 In the notation of a group (atomic group) in the present disclosure, the notation in which substitution and non-substitution are not included includes not only those having no substituent but also those having a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
本開示において、 「質量%」 と 「重量%」 とは同義であり、 「質量部」 と 「重量部」 とは同義である。 In the present disclosure, “mass %” and “weight %” have the same meaning, and “mass part” and “part by weight” have the same meaning.
本開示において、 2以上の好ましい態様の組み合わせは、 より好ましい態 様である。 In the present disclosure, a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
本開示において、 化学構造式は、 水素原子を省略した簡略構造式で記載す る場合もある。 In the present disclosure, the chemical structural formula may be described as a simplified structural formula in which a hydrogen atom is omitted.
本開示において 「露光」 とは、 特に断らない限り、 光を用いた露光のみな らず、 電子線、 イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も含む。 また、 露光に 用いられる光としては、 特に制限はないが、 例えば、 水銀灯の輝線スペク ト ル、 エキシマレーザに代表される遠紫外線、 極紫外線 (巳 II V光) 、 X線、 電子線等の活性光線 (活性エネルギー線) が挙げられる。 In the present disclosure, “exposure” includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using a particle beam such as an electron beam or an ion beam, unless otherwise specified. The light used for exposure is not particularly limited. For example, a bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, deep ultraviolet rays represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (IIV light), X-rays, electron rays, etc. Actinic rays (active energy rays) can be mentioned.
[001 5] <パターンつき基板の製造方法> [001 5] <Pattern manufacturing method>
本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法は、 仮支持体と、 ガラス転移温 〇 2020/174767 7 卩(:171?2019/044334 A method of manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure includes a temporary support, a glass transition temperature 〇 2020/174767 7 卩 (:171?2019/044334
度 (丁 9) が 5 0 °〇以上である酸分解性樹脂を含有する感光性樹脂組成物層 と、 を有する感光性転写材料における上記感光性樹脂組成物層、 及びポリイ ミ ド基板を接触させて、 上記感光性転写材料と上記ポリイミ ド基板とを貼り 合わせる工程 (以下、 「貼り合わせ工程」 ともいう。 ) を有する。 A photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a degree of rotation of 50° or more, and the photosensitive resin composition layer in a photosensitive transfer material having, and a polyimide substrate. Then, there is a step of bonding the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate (hereinafter, also referred to as “bonding step”).
[0016] 本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法は、 露光後の時間経過によるパ ターンの線幅の減少を抑制でき、 かつ、 高温条件下でのラミネート適性に優 れる。 本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法が上記効果を奏する理由は 明らかではないものの、 以下のように推察される。 [0016] The method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure can suppress a decrease in the line width of a pattern due to the passage of time after exposure, and has excellent laminating suitability under high temperature conditions. The reason why the method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure exerts the above effects is not clear, but is presumed as follows.
[0017] 露光後の時間経過によるパターンの線幅の減少は、 感光性樹脂組成物層の 過剰な分解によって発生すると考えられる。 本開示に係るパターンつき基板 の製造方法に適用される感光性転写材料は、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上で ある酸分解性樹脂を含有する感光性樹脂組成物層を有することで、 露光後に おける感光性樹脂組成物層中の酸の過剰な拡散を抑制できるため、 感光性樹 脂組成物層の過剰な酸分解反応を抑制できる。 そして、 本開示に係るバター ンつき基板の製造方法は、 仮支持体と、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上である 酸分解性樹脂を含有する感光性樹脂組成物層と、 を有する感光性転写材料に おける上記感光性樹脂組成物層、 及びポリイミ ド基板を接触させて、 上記感 光性転写材料と上記ポリイミ ド基板とを貼り合わせる工程を有することで、 高温条件下であっても、 ポリイミ ド基板が変形することなく感光性転写材料 及びポリイミ ド基板を密着できると考えられる。 このため、 感光性転写材料 及びポリイミ ド基板の密着性を向上できる。 したがって、 本開示に係るバタ —ンつき基板の製造方法は、 露光後の時間経過によるパターンの線幅の減少 を抑制でき、 かつ、 高温条件下でのラミネート適性に優れると考えられる。 The decrease in the line width of the pattern over time after exposure is considered to occur due to excessive decomposition of the photosensitive resin composition layer. The photosensitive transfer material applied to the method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure has a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher, thereby exposing Since it is possible to suppress the excessive diffusion of the acid in the photosensitive resin composition layer later, it is possible to suppress the excessive acid decomposition reaction of the photosensitive resin composition layer. The method for producing a substrate with butterflies according to the present disclosure is a photosensitive resin composition comprising: a temporary support; and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher. By including the step of bringing the photosensitive resin composition layer in the transfer material into contact with the polyimide substrate and bonding the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate, even under high temperature conditions, It is considered that the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate can be adhered to each other without the polyimide substrate deforming. Therefore, the adhesion between the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate can be improved. Therefore, it is considered that the method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure can suppress the decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after exposure, and is excellent in the suitability for lamination under high temperature conditions.
[0018] [貼り合わせ工程] [0018] [Laminating process]
本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法は、 仮支持体と、 ガラス転移温 度が 5 0 °〇以上である酸分解性樹脂を含有する感光性樹脂組成物層と、 を有 する感光性転写材料における上記感光性樹脂組成物層、 及びポリイミ ド基板 を接触させて、 上記感光性転写材料と上記ポリイミ ド基板とを貼り合わせる 〇 2020/174767 8 卩(:171?2019/044334 A method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure is a photosensitive transfer comprising: a temporary support; and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50° or higher. The photosensitive resin composition layer of the material and the polyimide substrate are brought into contact with each other, and the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate are bonded together. 〇2020/174767 8 卩(:171?2019/044334
工程を有する。 Have steps.
[0019] 感光性転写材料とポリイミ ド基板とを貼り合わせる方法としては、 制限さ れず、 公知の方法を適用できる。 感光性転写材料とポリイミ ド基板との貼り 合わせは、 例えば口ール等を用いて、 加圧及び加熱することにより行われる ことが好ましい。 また、 貼り合わせ工程においては、 例えば、 ラミネーター 、 真空ラミネーター、 及び、 より生産性を高めることができる才一トカッ ト ラミネーター等の公知のラミネーターを使用できる。 貼り合わせ工程は、 口 —ルツーロール方式、 すなわち、 口ール状の感光性転写材料と口ール状のポ リイミ ド基板とを貼り合わせる方式であることが好ましい。 [0019] The method of bonding the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate is not limited, and a known method can be applied. The bonding of the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate is preferably performed by applying pressure and heating using, for example, a mouth. Further, in the laminating step, known laminators such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and a talented laminator capable of increasing productivity can be used. The laminating step is preferably a mouth-to-roll method, that is, a method in which a mouth-shaped photosensitive transfer material and a mouth-shaped polyimide substrate are bonded.
[0020] 貼り合わせ工程において、 加熱温度は、 1 00°〇~ 1 50°〇であることが 好ましく、 1 1 〇°〇~ 1 50°〇であることがより好ましく、 1 20°〇~ 1 5 〇°〇であることがさらに好ましく、 1 20°〇~ 1 40°〇であることが特に好 ましい。 上記加熱温度が 1 0〇°〇以上であることで、 ポリイミ ド基板に感光 性転写材料を容易に貼り合わせることができる。 上記加熱温度が 1 50°〇以 下であることで、 ポリイミ ド基板の膜質の劣化を抑制できる。 [0020] In the bonding step, the heating temperature is preferably 100 ° 〇 to 150 ° 〇, more preferably 1 1 0 ° 〇 to 1 50 ° 〇, more preferably 1 20 ° 〇 to 1 More preferably, it is 5°°, and particularly preferably 120°° to 140°°. When the heating temperature is 100 ° C. or higher, the photosensitive transfer material can be easily attached to the polyimide substrate. When the heating temperature is 150 ° C. or lower, deterioration of the film quality of the polyimide substrate can be suppressed.
[0021] 貼り合わせ工程において接触型の加熱手段 (例えば、 口ール) を用いる場 合、 貼り合わせ工程における上記加熱温度は、 上記接触型の加熱手段の表面 温度を指す。 When a contact-type heating means (for example, a mouth) is used in the bonding step, the heating temperature in the bonding step refers to the surface temperature of the contact-type heating means.
また、 貼り合わせ工程において非接触型の加熱手段 (例えば、 ヒーター) を用いる場合、 貼り合わせ工程における上記加熱温度は、 感光性転写材料と ポリイミ ド基板との接触点までの感光性転写材料及びポリイミ ド基板の各表 面の到達温度を指す。 Further, when a non-contact type heating means (for example, a heater) is used in the bonding step, the heating temperature in the bonding step is the same as that of the photosensitive transfer material or the polyimide up to the contact point between the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate. The temperature reached on each surface of the printed circuit board.
[0022] 貼り合わせ工程において、 搬送速度は、 2. 5 /分〜 5. 〇 /分であ ることが好ましく、 3. 0 /分〜 5. 0 /分であることがより好ましい 。 上記搬送速度は、 貼り合わせ工程において搬送される感光性転写材料及び ポリイミ ド基板の各搬送速度を指す。 [0022] In the laminating step, the transport speed is preferably 2.5 /min to 5.0 /min, more preferably 3.0 /min to 5.0 /min. The above-mentioned transportation speed refers to each transportation speed of the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate transported in the bonding step.
[0023] 上記の中でも、 感光性転写材料とポリイミ ド基板とを貼り合わせる際にお いて、 加熱温度が 1 20°〇~ 1 50°〇であり、 かつ、 搬送速度が、 2. 〇 2020/174767 9 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0023] Among the above, have you when bonding the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate, the heating temperature is 1 20 ° 〇 ~ 1 50 ° 〇, and the conveying speed, 2. 〇 2020/174767 9 卩 (:171?2019/044334
/分〜 5. 0 m /分であることが好ましく、 加熱温度が 1 20 °C〜 1 40 °C であり、 かつ、 搬送速度が、 2. 5 m/分〜 5. Om/分であることがより 好ましい。 /Min to 5.0 m/min, heating temperature is 120 °C to 140 °C, and transport speed is 2.5 m/min to 5. Om/min Is more preferable.
[0024] 本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法は、 上記貼り合わせ工程に加え て、 上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性樹脂組成物層をパターン露光する 工程 (以下、 「露光工程」 ともいう。 ) と、 上記パターン露光された感光性 樹脂組成物層を現像して感光性樹脂組成物層のパターンを形成する工程 (以 下、 「現像工程」 ともいう。 ) と、 を有することが好ましい。 [0024] In the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure, in addition to the bonding step, a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer after the bonding step (hereinafter, also referred to as "exposure step") ) And a step of developing the pattern-exposed photosensitive resin composition layer to form a pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer (hereinafter, also referred to as “developing step”). ..
[0025] 以下、 露光工程、 及び現像工程について説明する。 [0025] The exposure step and the development step will be described below.
[0026] [露光工程] [0026] [Exposure step]
本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法は、 上記貼り合わせる工程後の 上記感光性樹脂組成物層をパターン露光する工程を有することが好ましい。 The method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure preferably has a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer after the attaching step.
[0027] 露光に使用する光源としては、 感光性樹脂組成物層を露光可能な波長域の 光 (例えば、 365 n m、 又は 405 n m) を照射できる光源が好ましい。 光源としては、 例えば、 超高圧水銀灯、 高圧水銀灯、 メタルハライ ドランプ 、 及び L E D (Light Emitting Diode) が挙げられる。 [0027] As the light source used for the exposure, a light source capable of irradiating light in a wavelength range capable of exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer (for example, 365 nm or 405 nm) is preferable. Examples of the light source include an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, and an LED (Light Emitting Diode).
[0028] 露光量は、 5 mJ/c m2〜 200 mJ/c m2であることが好ましく、 1 [0028] The exposure dose is preferably 5 mJ/cm 2 to 200 mJ/cm 2 ,
OmJ / c m2〜 1 00 mJ / c m2であることがより好ましい。 More preferably, it is OmJ/cm 2 to 100 mJ/cm 2 .
[0029] また、 パターン露光は、 マスクを介した露光でもよいし、 レーザー等を用 いたダイレクト露光でもよい。 [0029] Further, the pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or direct exposure using a laser or the like.
[0030] 露光工程においては、 感光性樹脂組成物層から仮支持体を剥離した後にパ ターン露光してもよく、 仮支持体を剥離する前に、 仮支持体を介してバター ン露光し、 その後、 仮支持体を剥離してもよい。 マスクを介して露光する場 合、 感光性樹脂組成物層とマスクとの接触によるマスク汚染の防止、 及びマ スクに付着した異物による露光への影響を避けるためには、 仮支持体を剥離 せずにパターン露光することが好ましい。 [0030] In the exposure step, pattern exposure may be performed after peeling the temporary support from the photosensitive resin composition layer, and pattern exposure may be performed via the temporary support before peeling the temporary support. After that, the temporary support may be peeled off. When exposing through a mask, in order to prevent mask contamination due to contact between the photosensitive resin composition layer and the mask and to avoid the influence of foreign matter adhering to the mask on the exposure, remove the temporary support. It is preferable to carry out the pattern exposure without using it.
[0031] 本開示において、 パターンの詳細な配置及び具体的サイズは、 制限されず 、 目的に応じて適宜設定すればよい。 例えばタッチパネル等の表示装置にお 〇 2020/174767 10 卩(:171?2019/044334 In the present disclosure, the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not limited, and may be set appropriately according to the purpose. For example, in a display device such as a touch panel 〇 2020/174767 10 卩 (:171?2019/044334
いては、 表示品質を高め、 また、 取り出し配線の占める面積をできるだけ小 さくする観点から、 バターンの少なくとも一部 (特にタッチパネルの電極パ 夕ーン及び取り出し配線の部分) は 1 0 0 以下の細線であることが好ま しく、 7〇 以下の細線であることがより好ましい。 In order to improve the display quality and minimize the area occupied by the extraction wiring, at least a part of the pattern (particularly the electrode pattern of the touch panel and the extraction wiring) is a fine wire of 100 or less. Is preferable, and a thin line of 70 or less is more preferable.
[0032] [現像工程] [0032] [Development process]
本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法は、 上記パターン露光された感 光性樹脂組成物層を現像して感光性樹脂組成物層のパターンを形成する工程 を有することが好ましい。 The method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure preferably has a step of developing the pattern-exposed light-sensitive resin composition layer to form a pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer.
[0033] また、 感光性転写材料が後述する中間層を有する場合、 現像工程において は、 露光された中間層は、 露光された感光性樹脂組成物層とともに除去され る。 さらに、 現像工程においては、 未露光部の中間層も、 現像液に溶解又は 分散することによって除去されてもよい。 [0033] When the photosensitive transfer material has an intermediate layer described below, the exposed intermediate layer is removed together with the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer in the developing step. Further, in the developing step, the intermediate layer in the unexposed area may also be removed by dissolving or dispersing it in a developing solution.
[0034] パターン露光された感光性樹脂組成物層の現像は、 現像液を用いて行うこ とができる。 The development of the photosensitive resin composition layer that has been subjected to pattern exposure can be performed using a developer.
現像液としては、 露光された感光性樹脂組成物層を除去できる現像液であ れば制限されず、 例えば、 特開平 5— 7 2 7 2 4号公報に記載の現像液等の 公知の現像液を使用できる。 なお、 現像液は、 感光性樹脂組成物層の露光部 (ポジ型の場合) が溶解型の現像挙動をする現像液であることが好ましい。 現像液は、 例えば、 < 3 = 7〜 1 3の化合物を〇. 0 5〇1〇 丨 / 1_ (リッ トル) 〜 5〇1〇 丨 / ! -の濃度で含むアルカリ水溶液系の現像液であることが 好ましい。 現像液は、 さらに、 水溶性の有機溶剤、 及び界面活性剤を含有し てもよい。 本開示において好適に用いられる現像液としては、 例えば、 国際 公開第 2 0 1 5 / 0 9 3 2 7 1号の段落 0 1 9 4に記載の現像液が挙げられ る。 The developing solution is not limited as long as it is a developing solution capable of removing the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer. For example, known developing solutions such as the developing solution described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used. A liquid can be used. The developing solution is preferably a developing solution in which the exposed portion (in the case of a positive type) of the photosensitive resin composition layer has a dissolution type developing behavior. The developing solution is, for example, an alkaline aqueous solution type developing solution containing a compound of <3 = 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0. 05 0 10 丨 / 1_ (litre) to 5 0 10 丨 / !-. Preferably. The developing solution may further contain a water-soluble organic solvent and a surfactant. Examples of the developer suitably used in the present disclosure include the developers described in paragraph 0 19 4 of International Publication No. 20 15/093 2 7 1.
なお、 現像液として、 感光性樹脂組成物層の未露光部 (ネガ型の場合) が 溶解型の現像挙動をする現像液を用いることもできる。 このような現像液と しては、 例えば、 酢酸プチル等の有機溶剤を挙げることができる。 As the developing solution, it is also possible to use a developing solution in which the unexposed portion (in the case of a negative type) of the photosensitive resin composition layer has a dissolution type developing behavior. Examples of such a developer include organic solvents such as butyl acetate.
[0035] 現像方式としては、 例えば、 パドル現像、 シャワー現像、 シャワー及びス 〇 2020/174767 1 1 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0035] Examples of development methods include paddle development, shower development, shower and spray. 〇 2020/174 767 1 1 卩 (: 171?2019/044334
ピン現像、 並びにディップ現像のいずれでもよい。 ここで、 シャワー現像に ついて説明すると、 露光後の感光性樹脂組成物層に現像液をシャワーにより 吹き付けることにより、 露光部分を除去することができる。 また、 現像の後 に、 洗浄剤等をシャワーにより吹き付け、 ブラシ等で擦りながら、 現像残渣 を除去することが好ましい。 現像液の液温度は 2 0 °〇〜 4 0 °〇が好ましい。 Either pin development or dip development may be used. Explaining shower development here, the exposed portion can be removed by spraying a developing solution onto the photosensitive resin composition layer after exposure with a shower. Further, after development, it is preferable to remove a development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like. The liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° to 40 ° .
[0036] 本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法は、 現像して得られた感光性樹 脂組成物層を含むパターンを加熱処理するポストべークエ程を有していても よい。 The method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure may have a post-baking step in which a pattern containing a photosensitive resin composition layer obtained by development is heat-treated.
ポストべークの温度は、 8 0 °〇~ 2 5 0 °〇であることが好ましく、 1 1 0 °〇~ 1 7 0 °〇であることがより好ましく、 1 3 0 °〇~ 1 5 0 °〇であることが 特に好ましい。 Temperature of the post baking is preferably 8 0 ° 〇 ~ 2 5 0 ° 〇, more preferably 1 1 0 ° 〇 ~ 1 7 0 ° 〇, 1 3 0 ° 〇 ~ 1 5 Particularly preferred is 0°.
ポストべークの時間は、 1分〜 3 0分であることが好ましく、 2分〜 1 0 分であることがより好ましく、 2分〜 4分であることが特に好ましい。 ポストべークは、 空気環境下で行っても、 窒素置換環境下で行ってもよい The post-baking time is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 minutes to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes. Post bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
[0037] また、 感光性転写材料が後述する保護フィルムを有する場合、 本開示に係 るパターンつき基板の製造方法は、 必要に応じて、 感光性転写材料の保護フ ィルムを剥離する工程 (以下、 「保護フィルム剥離工程」 ともいう。 ) を有 していてもよい。 保護フィルム剥離工程については、 後述の 「回路基板の製 造方法」 の項において説明する。 Further, when the photosensitive transfer material has a protective film described later, the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure includes a step of peeling off the protective film of the photosensitive transfer material (hereinafter , “Protective film peeling step”). The protective film peeling step will be described in the section "Method for manufacturing circuit board" described later.
[0038] 本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法により製造されるパターンつき 基板は、 少なくとも、 ポリイミ ド基板と、 感光性樹脂組成物層と、 をこの順 で有する。 [0038] The patterned substrate produced by the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure includes at least a polyimide substrate and a photosensitive resin composition layer in this order.
[0039] 次に、 本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法に適用されるポリイミ ド 基板、 及び感光性転写材料について説明する。 Next, a polyimide substrate and a photosensitive transfer material applied to the method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure will be described.
[0040] [基板] [0040] [Substrate]
本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法においては、 基板として、 ポリ イミ ド基板が適用される。 本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法におい 〇 2020/174767 12 卩(:171?2019/044334 In the method of manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure, a polyimide substrate is used as the substrate. In the method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure 〇 2020/174767 12 卩 (:171?2019/044334
ては、 ポリイミ ド基板と後述する感光性転写材料とを貼り合わせることで、 高温条件下で優れたラミネート適性を実現できる。 In particular, by bonding a polyimide substrate and a photosensitive transfer material described below, excellent laminating suitability can be realized under high temperature conditions.
[0041] ポリイミ ド基板を構成するポリイミ ドは、 イミ ド結合を含む高分子化合物 であれば制限されず、 公知のポリイミ ドを使用できる。 また、 ポリイミ ド基 板は、 市販品であつてもよい。 ポリイミ ド基板は、 例えば、 丁〇 IV!巳 0 ( 登録商標) 丁 7 6乂 (株式会社アイ. エス. テイ製) 、 丁〇[¾ 1\/1巳 0 丁 7 6 3 (株式会社アイ. エス. テイ製) 、 又はカプトン (登録商標) 1 0 0 1~1 (東レ ·デュポン株式会社製) として入手可能である。 上記市販品の 中でも、 ポリイミ ド基板は、 光学特性の観点から、 丁〇[¾ 1\/1巳 0
Figure imgf000014_0001
[0041] The polyimide forming the polyimide substrate is not limited as long as it is a polymer compound containing an imide bond, and a known polyimide can be used. Further, the polyimide substrate may be a commercially available product. Polyimide substrates are available, for example, as follows: IV IV! 0 (registered trademark) Ding 7 6 (made by A.S.T. Co., Ltd.) Ding [¾ 1\/1 M 0 0 Ding 7 6 3 (I.D. .S.T.) or Kapton (registered trademark) 1001 to 1 (manufactured by Toray DuPont Co., Ltd.). Among the above-mentioned commercial products, the polyimide substrate is suitable for optical characteristics.
Figure imgf000014_0001
X、 又は丁〇[¾ 1\/1巳 0 丁ソ 6 3であることが好ましい。 It is preferable that the value is X, or □ [¾ 1\/1 刳 0 蔚 zo 63.
[0042] ポリイミ ド基板のヘイズは、 3 . 0 %以下であることが好ましく、 2 . 0 %以下であることがより好ましく、 1 . 0 %以下であることがさらに好まし く、 0 . 5 %以下であることが特に好ましい。 ポリイミ ド基板のヘイズが 3 . 0 %以下であることで、 光の散乱を抑制できる。 このため、 例えば表示装 置における表示特性 (例えば、 輝度) を向上できる。 ポリイミ ド基板のヘイ ズの下限は、 制限されない。 ポリイミ ド基板のヘイズは、 例えば、 0 %以上 の範囲で適宜設定すればよい。 [0042] The haze of the polyimide substrate is preferably 3.0% or less, more preferably 2.0% or less, still more preferably 1.0% or less, 0.5 It is particularly preferably not more than %. When the haze of the polyimide substrate is 3.0% or less, light scattering can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the display characteristics (for example, brightness) of the display device can be improved. The lower limit of haze for polyimide substrates is not limited. The haze of the polyimide substrate may be set appropriately in the range of 0% or more, for example.
[0043] ポリイミ ド基板のヘイズは、 ヘイズメーター (例えば、 0 1~1 2 0 0 0、 日本電色工業株式会社製) を用いて測定する。 [0043] The haze of the polyimide substrate is measured using a haze meter (for example, 0 1 to 1200, manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd.).
[0044] ポリイミ ド基板の全光透過率は、 8 5 %以上であることが好ましく、 8 8 %以上であることがより好ましく、 9 0 %以上であることがさらに好ましく 、 9 5 %以上であることが特に好ましい。 ポリイミ ド基板の全光透過率が 8 5 %以上であることで、 ポリイミ ド基板の光透過性を向上できる。 このため 、 例えば表示装置における表示特性 (例えば、 輝度) を向上できる。 ポリイ ミ ド基板の全光透過率の上限は、 制限されない。 ポリイミ ド基板の全光透過 率は、 例えば、 1 0 0 %以下の範囲で適宜設定すればよい。 [0044] The total light transmittance of the polyimide substrate is preferably 85% or more, more preferably 88% or more, further preferably 90% or more, and 95% or more. It is particularly preferable that The light transmittance of the polyimide substrate can be improved because the total light transmittance of the polyimide substrate is 85% or more. Therefore, for example, the display characteristics (eg, brightness) of the display device can be improved. The upper limit of the total light transmittance of the polyimide substrate is not limited. The total light transmittance of the polyimide substrate may be set appropriately in the range of 100% or less, for example.
[0045] ポリイミ ド基板の全光透過率は、 分光光度計 (例えば、 II V _ 2 1 0 0、 株式会社島津製作所製) を用いて測定する。 〇 2020/174767 13 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0045] The total light transmittance of the polyimide substrate is measured using a spectrophotometer (for example, II V_210, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation). 〇2020/174767 13 卩(:171?2019/044334
[0046] ポリイミ ド基板は、 導電性層を有していてもよい。 ポリイミ ド基板が導電 性層を有する場合、 ポリイミ ド基板は、 少なくとも一方の表面に導電性層を 有することが好ましい。 また、 ポリイミ ド基板が導電性層を有する場合、 ポ リイミ ド基板は、 少なくとも感光性転写材料が貼り合わされる側の表面に導 電性を有することが好ましい。 ポリイミ ド基板が導電性層を有することで、 例えば、 導電性パターンを形成できる。 [0046] The polyimide substrate may have a conductive layer. When the polyimide substrate has a conductive layer, it is preferable that the polyimide substrate has a conductive layer on at least one surface thereof. When the polyimide substrate has a conductive layer, it is preferable that at least the surface of the polyimide substrate on which the photosensitive transfer material is attached has conductivity. Since the polyimide substrate has the conductive layer, for example, a conductive pattern can be formed.
[0047] 本開示において、 「導電性」 とは、 体積抵抗率が 1 X 1 06Qc m未満であ ることを意味し、 体積抵抗率が 1 X 1 04 Q c m未満であることが好ましい。 [0047] In the present disclosure, "conductivity" means that the volume resistivity is less than 1 X 10 6 Qcm, and the volume resistivity is less than 1 X 10 4 Q cm. preferable.
[0048] ポリイミ ド基材上に形成されている導電性層としては、 一般的な回路配線 又はタッチパネル配線に用いられる任意の導電性層が挙げられる。 [0048] Examples of the conductive layer formed on the polyimide base material include any conductive layer used for general circuit wiring or touch panel wiring.
[0049] 導電性層としては、 導電性、 及び細線形成性の観点から、 金属層、 導電性 金属酸化物層、 グラフエン層、 力ーボンナノチユーブ層、 及び導電ポリマー 層よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも 1種の層であることが好ましく、 金属 層、 及び導電性金属酸化物層よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも 1種の層で あることがより好ましく、 金属層であることがさらに好ましく、 銅層、 又は 銀層であることが特に好ましい。 [0049] The conductive layer is selected from the group consisting of a metal layer, a conductive metal oxide layer, a graphene layer, a carbon nanotube layer, and a conductive polymer layer from the viewpoints of conductivity and fine wire forming property. At least one layer is preferable, at least one layer selected from the group consisting of a metal layer, and a conductive metal oxide layer is more preferable, and a metal layer is further preferable. A copper layer or a silver layer is particularly preferable.
[0050] 金属層を構成する材料としては、 例えば、 アルミニウム、 亜鉛、 銅、 鉄、 ニッケル、 クロム、 モリブデン、 銀、 及び金が挙げられる。 [0050] Examples of the material forming the metal layer include aluminum, zinc, copper, iron, nickel, chromium, molybdenum, silver, and gold.
[0051] 導電性金属酸化物層を構成する材料としては、 例えば、 I TO ( I n d i u m T i n Ox i d e) 、 I Z〇 ( I n d i u m Z i n c 〇x i d e) 、 及び S i 〇2が挙げられる。 The material constituting the [0051] conductive metal oxide layer, for example, I TO (I ndium T in Ox ide), IZ_〇 (I ndium Z inc 〇_Xide), and S i 〇 2.
[0052] ポリイミ ド基板は、 1層の導電性層を有していてもよく、 2層以上の導電 性層を有していてもよい。 ポリイミ ド基板が 2層以上の導電性層を有する場 合、 ポリイミ ド基板は、 互いに異なる材料の導電性層を有することが好まし い。 さらに、 ポリイミ ド基板が 2層以上の導電性層を有する場合、 2層以上 の導電性層のうち少なくとも 1つの導電性層は導電性金属酸化物を含むこと が好ましい。 [0052] The polyimide substrate may have one conductive layer, or may have two or more conductive layers. When the polyimide substrate has two or more conductive layers, it is preferable that the polyimide substrate have conductive layers made of different materials. Further, when the polyimide substrate has two or more conductive layers, at least one conductive layer of the two or more conductive layers preferably contains a conductive metal oxide.
[0053] 導電性層としては、 静電容量型タッチパネルに用いられる視認部のセンサ 〇 2020/174767 14 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0053] As the conductive layer, a sensor of a visual recognition portion used in a capacitive touch panel 〇 2020/174767 14 卩 (:171?2019/044334
—に相当する電極バターン又は周辺取り出し部の配線であることが好ましい It is preferable that it is the wiring of the electrode pattern or the peripheral extraction portion corresponding to
[0054] ポリイミ ド基板の厚さは、 制限されず、 用途に応じて適宜設定すればよい 。 ポリイミ ド基板の平均厚さは、 強度、 パターン直線性及び 巳 0の抑制性 の観点から、 1 0 ~ 2 0 0 01であることが好ましく、 1 〇 111 ~ 1 0 0 〇1であることがより好ましく、 1 〇 〇1 ~ 6 0 であることが特に好 ましい。 [0054] The thickness of the polyimide substrate is not limited and may be appropriately set depending on the application. The average thickness of the polyimide substrate is preferably from 10 to 200100, from the viewpoint of strength, pattern linearity, and the controllability of M0, and is from 1101 to 1001. It is more preferable, and it is particularly preferable that it is from 1001 to 60.
[0055] ポリイミ ド基板の平均厚さは、 以下の方法によって測定する。 The average thickness of the polyimide substrate is measured by the following method.
走査型電子顕微鏡 (3巳1\/1) を用いて、 ポリイミ ド基板の厚み方向の断面 を観察し、 ポリイミ ド基板の厚さを 1 〇箇所測定する。 得られた測定値の算 術平均値を、 ポリイミ ド基板の平均厚さとする。 Using a scanning electron microscope (3/ 1\/1), observe the cross section of the polyimide board in the thickness direction and measure the thickness of the polyimide board at 10 locations. The arithmetic average value of the measured values is taken as the average thickness of the polyimide substrate.
[0056] [感光性転写材料] [0056] [Photosensitive transfer material]
本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法において、 感光性転写材料は、 仮支持体と、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上である酸分解性樹脂を含有する感 光性樹脂組成物層と、 を有する。 本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造方法 においては、 上記感光性転写材料を用いることで、 露光後における感光性樹 脂組成物層中の酸の過剰な拡散を抑制できるため、 感光性樹脂組成物層の過 剰な酸分解反応を抑制できる。 このため、 露光後の時間経過によるパターン の線幅の減少を抑制できる。 In the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure, the photosensitive transfer material is a temporary support, and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher, Have. In the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure, by using the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer material, it is possible to suppress excessive diffusion of acid in the photosensitive resin composition layer after exposure, and thus the photosensitive resin composition Excessive acid decomposition reaction of the layer can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after the exposure.
[0057] 以下、 感光性転写材料の各構成について説明する。 Hereinafter, each constitution of the photosensitive transfer material will be described.
[0058] 〔仮支持体〕 [0058] [Temporary support]
感光性転写材料は、 仮支持体を有する。 仮支持体は、 感光性樹脂組成物層 を支持し、 感光性樹脂組成物層から剥離可能な支持体である。 The photosensitive transfer material has a temporary support. The temporary support is a support that supports the photosensitive resin composition layer and can be peeled from the photosensitive resin composition layer.
[0059] 仮支持体は、 感光性樹脂組成物層をパターン露光する場合において、 仮支 持体を介して感光性樹脂組成物層を露光し得る観点から光透過性を有するこ とが好ましい。 ここで、 光透過性を有するとは、 パターン露光に使用する光 の主波長の透過率が 5 0 %以上であることを意味し、 パターン露光に使用す る光の主波長の透過率は、 露光感度向上の観点から、 6 0 %以上が好ましく 〇 2020/174767 1 5 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0059] The temporary support preferably has optical transparency from the viewpoint that the photosensitive resin composition layer can be exposed through the temporary support when the photosensitive resin composition layer is subjected to pattern exposure. Here, having light transmittance means that the transmittance of the dominant wavelength of the light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the dominant wavelength of the light used for pattern exposure is From the viewpoint of improving exposure sensitivity, 60% or more is preferable. 〇 2020/174767 1 5 (: 171?2019/044334
、 7 0 %以上がより好ましい。 透過率の測定方法としては、 分光光度計 (例 えば、 大塚電子株式会社製 1\/1〇 0 3 6 「 丨 6 3) を用いて測定する方法 が挙げられる。 , 70% or more is more preferable. As a method of measuring the transmittance, there is a method of measuring using a spectrophotometer (eg, 1\/1 0 0 3 6 "丨 6 3" manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.).
[0060] 仮支持体としては、 例えば、 ガラス基板、 樹脂フィルム、 及び紙が挙げら れ、 強度及び可撓性等の観点から、 樹脂フィルムが特に好ましい。 樹脂フィ ルムとしては、 例えば、 ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、 トリ酢酸セ ルロースフイルム、 ポリスチレンフイルム、 ポリカーボネートフイルム、 及 びポリイミ ドフィルムが挙げられる。 上記の中でも、 仮支持体としては、 2 軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが特に好ましい。 [0060] Examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, and paper, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility. Examples of the resin film include polyethylene terephthalate film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film, and polyimide film. Among the above, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable as the temporary support.
[0061 ] 仮支持体の厚さは、 支持体としての強度、 回路配線形成用基板との貼り合 わせに求められる可撓性、 最初の露光工程で要求される光透過性等の観点か ら、 材質に応じて適宜設定すればよい。 仮支持体の平均厚さは、 5 〜 2 0 0 〇!であることが好ましく、 取扱い易さ、 巩用性等の点で、 1 0 |^ ~ 1 5 0 であることがより好ましい。 仮支持体の平均厚さは、 上記ポリイ ミ ド基板の平均厚さの測定方法に準ずる方法で測定する。 [0061] The thickness of the temporary support is determined from the viewpoints of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding with a circuit wiring formation substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure step, and the like. It may be appropriately set according to the material. The average thickness of the temporary support is preferably from 5 to 200!, and more preferably from 10 |^ to 150 because of ease of handling and stability. The average thickness of the temporary support is measured by a method according to the method for measuring the average thickness of the polyimide substrate.
[0062] 仮支持体の好ましい態様については、 例えば、 特開 2 0 1 4 _ 8 5 6 4 3 号公報の段落〇〇 1 7〜段落 0 0 1 8に記載がある。 上記文献の記載は、 参 照により本明細書に組み込まれる。 [0062] Preferable embodiments of the temporary support are described, for example, in paragraphs XX017 to 01718 of JP-A No. 2014_856543. The descriptions of the above documents are incorporated herein by reference.
[0063] 〔感光性樹脂組成物層〕 [Photosensitive resin composition layer]
感光性転写材料は、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上である酸分解性樹脂を含 有する感光性樹脂組成物層を有する。 感光性転写材料が、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上である酸分解性樹脂を含有する感光性樹脂組成物層を有すること で、 露光後の時間経過によるパターンの線幅の減少を抑制できる。 The photosensitive transfer material has a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° or higher. Since the photosensitive transfer material has a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the line width of the pattern with the passage of time after exposure. ..
[0064] 感光性樹脂組成物層において、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上である酸分解 性樹脂以外の材料は、 制限されず、 公知の酸分解型感光性樹脂組成物層にお いて使用される公知の材料を使用できる。 [0064] In the photosensitive resin composition layer, materials other than the acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° or higher are not limited, and are used in known acid-decomposable photosensitive resin composition layers. Known materials can be used.
[0065] 感光性樹脂組成物層は、 感度及び解像度の観点から、 酸分解性樹脂と、 光 酸発生剤と、 を含有することが好ましく、 酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有 〇 2020/174767 16 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0065] From the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, the photosensitive resin composition layer preferably contains an acid-decomposable resin and a photo-acid generator, and has an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. 〇2020/174767 16 卩(:171?2019/044334
する構成単位 (以下、 「構成単位 」 ともいう。 ) を含む重合体 (以下、 「 重合体 X」 ともいう。 ) と、 光酸発生剤と、 を含有することがより好ましい 。 すなわち、 感光性樹脂組成物層は、 化学増幅型の感光性樹脂組成物層であ ることが好ましい。 It is more preferable to contain a polymer (hereinafter, also referred to as “polymer X”) containing a structural unit (hereinafter, also referred to as “structural unit”) to be used, and a photo-acid generator. That is, the photosensitive resin composition layer is preferably a chemically amplified photosensitive resin composition layer.
[0066] 感光性樹脂組成物層が後述するオニウム塩、 オキシムスルホネート化合物 等の光酸発生剤を含有する場合、 活性放射線 (活性光線) に感応して生成さ れる酸は、 上記重合体中の保護された酸基の脱保護に対して触媒として作用 する。 1個の光量子の作用で生成した酸が、 多数の脱保護反応に寄与するた め、 量子収率は 1 を超え、 例えば、 1 〇の数乗のような大きい値となり、 い わゆる化学増幅の結果として、 高感度が得られる。 _方、 活性光線に感応す る光酸発生剤としてキノンジアジド化合物を用いた場合、 逐次型光化学反応 によりカルボキシ基を生成するが、 その量子収率は必ず 1以下であり、 化学 増幅型には該当しない。 [0066] When the photosensitive resin composition layer contains a photoacid generator such as an onium salt or an oxime sulfonate compound described below, the acid generated in response to actinic radiation (actinic ray) is It acts as a catalyst for the deprotection of protected acid groups. Since the acid generated by the action of one photon contributes to a large number of deprotection reactions, the quantum yield exceeds 1, which is a large value, for example, to the power of 10. As a result, high sensitivity is obtained. On the other hand, when a quinonediazide compound is used as a photoacid generator that is sensitive to actinic rays, it produces a carboxy group by a sequential photochemical reaction, but its quantum yield is always 1 or less, which is applicable to the chemical amplification type. do not do.
[0067] (酸分解性樹脂) [0067] (Acid-decomposable resin)
感光性樹脂組成物層は、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上である酸分解性樹脂 を含有する。 感光性樹脂組成物層が、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上である酸 分解性樹脂を含有することで、 露光後の時間経過によるパターンの線幅の減 少を抑制できる。 The photosensitive resin composition layer contains an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher. Since the photosensitive resin composition layer contains the acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after exposure.
[0068] 酸分解性樹脂としては、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上であり、 かつ、 酸と の作用によって分解可能な樹脂であれば制限されない。 ここで、 「分解」 と の用語は、 単に化学結合の切断を伴う反応に限られず、 化学構造の変換を伴 う反応を包含する。 酸分解性樹脂は、 酸との作用によって極性が変化するこ とで、 例えば、 後述する現像液に対する溶解性が増大する。 The acid-decomposable resin is not limited as long as it has a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher and can be decomposed by the action of an acid. Here, the term “decomposition” is not limited to a reaction involving the breaking of a chemical bond, but includes a reaction involving the conversion of a chemical structure. The acid-decomposable resin changes its polarity due to the action with acid, so that, for example, the solubility in a developing solution described later increases.
[0069] 酸分解性樹脂は、 感度及び解像度の観点から、 酸分解性基で保護された酸 基を有する構成単位 (構成単位 ) を含む重合体 (重合体 X) であることが 好ましい。 From the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, the acid-decomposable resin is preferably a polymer (polymer X) containing a constitutional unit (constitutional unit) having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
[0070] 酸分解性基で保護された酸基は、 露光により生じる触媒量の酸等の酸性物 質の作用により、 脱保護反応を経て酸基に変換される。 上記酸基により、 感 〇 2020/174767 17 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0070] An acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is converted into an acid group through a deprotection reaction by the action of a catalytic amount of an acid substance such as an acid generated by exposure. With the above acid group, 〇2020/174767 17 卩(:171?2019/044334
光性樹脂組成物層の現像液への溶解が可能となる。 It is possible to dissolve the photosensitive resin composition layer in the developing solution.
[0071 ] 重合体 Xは、 付加重合型の重合体であることが好ましく、 (メタ) アクリ ル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位を含む重合体であることがより好 ましい。 なお、 重合体 Xは、 (メタ) アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来す る構成単位以外の構成単位 (例えば、 スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位、 又はビニル化合物に由来する構成単位) を有していてもよい。 The polymer X is preferably an addition polymerization type polymer, and more preferably a polymer containing a structural unit derived from (meth)acrylic acid or its ester. The polymer X has a structural unit other than the structural unit derived from (meth)acrylic acid or its ester (for example, a structural unit derived from a styrene compound or a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound). Good.
[0072] 以下、 構成単位 の好ましい態様について説明する。 [0072] Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the structural unit will be described.
[0073] 構成単位八 [0073] Building unit eight
構成単位 は、 酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位である。 The structural unit is a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
[0074] 本開示において、 「酸基」 とは、 < 3が 1 2以下のプロトン解離性基を 意味する。 酸基の
Figure imgf000019_0001
3は、 感度向上の観点から、 1 0以下が好ましく、 6 以下がより好ましい。 また、 酸基の < 3は、 一 5以上であることが好まし い。 酸基は、 カルボキシ基、 又はフエノール性水酸基であることが好ましい
[0074] In the present disclosure, the "acid group" means a proton-dissociable group in which <3 is 12 or less. Acidic
Figure imgf000019_0001
From the viewpoint of improving sensitivity, 3 is preferably 10 or less, and more preferably 6 or less. Further, <3 of the acid group is preferably 15 or more. The acid group is preferably a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group
[0075] 酸分解性基としては、 制限されず、 公知の酸分解性基を使用できる。 酸分 解性基としては、 例えば、 酸により比較的分解し易い基 (例えば、 1 -アル コキシアルキル基、 テトラヒドロピラニル基、 テトラヒドロフラニル基等の アセタール型保護基) 、 及び酸により比較的分解し難い基 (例えば、 1 6 「
Figure imgf000019_0002
[0075] The acid-decomposable group is not limited and known acid-decomposable groups can be used. Examples of the acid-labile group include groups that are relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, acetal-type protecting groups such as 1-alkoxyalkyl group, tetrahydropyranyl group, and tetrahydrofuranyl group), and groups that are relatively difficult to be decomposed by acid. (For example, 1 6 "
Figure imgf000019_0002
等の第三級アルキルオキシカルボニル基 (すなわち、 炭酸エステル型保護基 ) ) が挙げられる。 And other tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl groups (that is, carbonic acid ester type protecting groups).
[0076] 上記の中でも、 酸分解性基は、 アセタールの形で保護された構造を有する 基であることが好ましい。 酸分解性基は、 感度の観点から、 環状構造を有す る基であることが好ましく、 テトラヒドロフラン環構造、 又はテトラヒドロ ピラン環構造を有する基であることがより好ましく、 テトラヒドロフラン環 構造を有する基であることがさらに好ましく、 テトラヒドロフラニル基であ ることが特に好ましい。 また、 酸分解性基は、 導電パターンの形成に適用し た場合における導電配線の線幅のバラツキが抑制される観点から、 分子量が 〇 2020/174767 18 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0076] Among the above, the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of acetal. From the viewpoint of sensitivity, the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a cyclic structure, more preferably a group having a tetrahydrofuran ring structure or a tetrahydropyran ring structure, and a group having a tetrahydrofuran ring structure. Is more preferably, and a tetrahydrofuranyl group is particularly preferable. In addition, the acid-decomposable group has a molecular weight of from the viewpoint of suppressing the variation in the line width of the conductive wiring when applied to the formation of the conductive pattern. 〇2020/174767 18 卩(:171?2019/044334
300以下の酸分解性基であることが好ましい。 It is preferably an acid-decomposable group of 300 or less.
[0077] 構成単位 は、 感度及び解像度の観点から、 下記式 1 により表される構 成単位、 式 2により表される構成単位、 及び式 3により表される構成単 位よりなる群から選択される少なくとも 1種の構成単位であることが好まし い。 [0077] The constitutional unit is selected from the group consisting of a constitutional unit represented by the following formula 1, a constitutional unit represented by the formula 2, and a constitutional unit represented by the formula 3 from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. Preferably, it is at least one type of structural unit.
[0078] [化 1] [0078] [Chemical 1]
014 014
Figure imgf000020_0001
Figure imgf000020_0001
式 41 Formula 41
[0079] 式 1中、
Figure imgf000020_0002
及び[¾12は、 それぞれ独立して、 水素原子、 アルキル基、 又はアリール基を表し、
Figure imgf000020_0003
[0079] In Formula 1,
Figure imgf000020_0002
And [¾ 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group,
Figure imgf000020_0003
リール基であり、
Figure imgf000020_0004
は、 アルキル基、 又はアリール基を表し、 [¾1 1又は[¾1 2と、
Figure imgf000020_0005
13とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、 [¾14は、 水素原子、 又はメチル基を表し、 X1は、 単結合、 又は二価の連結基を表し、
Figure imgf000020_0006
は、 置 換基を表し、 !!は、 〇〜 4の整数を表す。
It is a reel base,
Figure imgf000020_0004
Represents an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and [¾ 1 1 or [¾ 1 2,
Figure imgf000020_0005
13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and [ 14 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X 1 is a single bond or a divalent linking group,
Figure imgf000020_0006
Represents a displacing group, and! ! Represents an integer from 0 to 4.
式八 2中、
Figure imgf000020_0007
及び[¾22は、 それぞれ独立して、 水素原子、 アルキル基、 又はアリール基を表し、
Figure imgf000020_0008
In Eq. 2
Figure imgf000020_0007
And [¾ 22 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group,
Figure imgf000020_0008
リール基であり、 [¾23は、 アルキル基、 又はアリール基を表し、 [¾21又は[¾2 2と、 [¾23とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、 [¾24は、 それぞれ独 立して、 ヒドロキシ基、 ハロゲン原子、 アルキル基、 アルコキシ基、 アルケ ニル基、 アリール基、 アラルキル基、 アルコキシカルボニル基、 ヒドロキシ アルキル基、 アリールカルボニル基、 アリールオキシカルボニル基、 又はシ クロアルキル基を表し、 〇〜 3の整数を表す。 〇 2020/174767 19 卩(:171?2019/044334 An aryl group, [¾ 23 represents an alkyl group, or an aryl group, [and ¾ 21 or [¾ 2 2, may form a cyclic ether linked and the [¾ 23,24 is , Each independently, a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, or a cycloalkyl group. It represents a group and represents an integer of 0 to 3. 〇 2020/174767 19 卩 (:171?2019/044334
式八 3中、
Figure imgf000021_0001
は、 それぞれ独立して、 水素原子、 アルキル基、 又はアリール基を表し、
Figure imgf000021_0002
In Ekihachi 3,
Figure imgf000021_0001
Are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group,
Figure imgf000021_0002
リール基であり、
Figure imgf000021_0003
又はアリール基を表し、
Figure imgf000021_0004
It is a reel base,
Figure imgf000021_0003
Or represents an aryl group,
Figure imgf000021_0004
と、 [¾33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、 [¾34は、 水素原子、 又はメチル基を表し、 X◦は、 単結合、 又は二価の連結基を表す。 And [ 33] may be linked to form a cyclic ether, [ 34 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X is a single bond or a divalent linking group.
[0080] 上記の中でも、 構成単位 は、 式 3により表される構成単位であること がより好ましい。 式 3で表される構成単位は、 アセタール型酸分解性基で 保護されたカルボキシ基を有する構成単位である。 重合体 Xが式 3で表さ れる構成単位を含むことで、 パターン形成時の感度に優れ、 また、 解像度が より優れる。 [0080] Among the above, the structural unit is more preferably a structural unit represented by Formula 3. The constitutional unit represented by the formula 3 is a constitutional unit having a carboxy group protected by an acetal-type acid-decomposable group. When the polymer X contains the constitutional unit represented by the formula 3, the sensitivity during pattern formation is excellent and the resolution is further excellent.
[0081] 式 3中、 [¾31又は[¾32がアルキル基の場合、 アルキル基は、 炭素数 1〜 [0081] In the formula 3, [when 31 or 32 is an alkyl group, the alkyl group has 1 to
1 0のアルキル基であることが好ましい。 式八3中、 [¾31又は[¾32がアリー ル基の場合、 アリール基は、 フエニル基であることが好ましい。 [¾31及び[¾3 2は、 それぞれ、 水素原子又は炭素数 1〜 4のアルキル基が好ましい。 It is preferably 10 alkyl groups. In the formula (8), when [ 31 or [ 32 is an aryl group, the aryl group is preferably a phenyl group. [¾ 31 and [¾ 3 2 are each hydrogen atom or an alkyl group of carbon number 1-4 are preferred.
式八 3中、 [¾33は、 アルキル基、 又はアリール基を表し、 炭素数 1〜 1 0 のアルキル基であることが好ましく、 炭素数 1〜 6のアルキル基であること がより好ましい。 In formula 83, [| 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
また、 [¾31〜[¾33におけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、 置換基を有して いてもよい。Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in [ 31 to [ 33] may have a substituent.
Figure imgf000021_0005
Figure imgf000021_0005
よく、 [¾31又は[¾32と、 [¾33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好 ましい。 環状エーテルの環員数は特に制限されないが、 5又は 6であること が好ましく、 5であることがより好ましい。 Good, [and ¾ 31 or [¾ 32, it is good preferable to form a cyclic ether linked and the [¾ 33. The number of ring members in the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
[0083] 式八3中、 X。は、 単結合又はアリーレン基であることが好ましく、 単結合 であることがより好ましい。 X。におけるアリーレン基は、 置換基を有してい てもよい。 [0083] X in the formula 8. Is preferably a single bond or an arylene group, and more preferably a single bond. X. The arylene group in may have a substituent.
[0084] 式八 3中、
Figure imgf000021_0006
は、 水素原子、 又はメチル基を表し、 重合体 Xのガラス転 移温度 (丁 9) をより低く し得るという観点から、 水素原子であることが好 〇 2020/174767 20 卩(:171?2019/044334
[0084] In Formula 8,
Figure imgf000021_0006
Represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the glass transition temperature (polymer 9) of polymer X can be further lowered. 〇2020/174767 20 卩(:171?2019/044334
ましい。 Good
[0085] 重合体 Xに含まれる構成単位 の全量に対し、 式 3において 3 4が水素 原子である構成単位の含有量は、 2 0質量%以上であることが好ましい。 なお、 構成単位 中の、
Figure imgf000022_0001
[0085] with respect to the total amount of the structural units contained in the polymer X, the content of the constituent unit 3 4 is a hydrogen atom in Formula 3 is preferably two 0 mass% or more. In addition, in the structural unit,
Figure imgf000022_0001
含有量 (含有割合:質量比) は、 1 3〇-核磁気共鳴スペクトル
Figure imgf000022_0002
測 定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができ る。
The content (content: weight ratio), 1 3 〇- nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum
Figure imgf000022_0002
It can be confirmed from the intensity ratio of the peak intensities calculated by the usual method from the measurement.
[0086] また、 式八 1 ~式八3の好ましい態様としては、 国際公開第 2 0 1 8 / 1 [0086] In addition, as a preferred embodiment of Formulas 8 1 to 3, there are:
7 9 6 4 0号の段落 0 0 4 4〜段落 0 0 5 8を参照することができる。 Reference may be made to paragraphs 0 0 4 4 to 0 0 5 8 of No. 7 9 6 40.
[0087] 式 1〜式 3において、 酸分解性基は、 感度の観点から、 環状構造を有 する基であることが好ましく、 テトラヒドロフラン環構造、 又はテトラヒド ロピラン環構造を有する基であることがより好ましく、 テトラヒドロフラン 環構造を有する基であることがさらに好ましく、 テトラヒドロフラニル基で あることが特に好ましい。 [0087] In Formulas 1 to 3, the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a cyclic structure from the viewpoint of sensitivity, and more preferably a group having a tetrahydrofuran ring structure or a tetrahydropyran ring structure. A group having a tetrahydrofuran ring structure is more preferable, and a tetrahydrofuranyl group is particularly preferable.
[0088] 重合体 Xは、 1種単独の構成単位 を含んでいてもよく、 2種以上の構成 単位八を含んでいてもよい。 [0088] The polymer X may contain one kind of constitutional unit alone, or may contain two or more kinds of constitutional unit eight.
[0089] 重合体 Xにおける構成単位 の含有量は、 重合体 Xの全質量に対して、 1 [0089] The content of the structural unit in the polymer X is 1 with respect to the total mass of the polymer X.
0質量%〜 7 0質量%であることが好ましく、 1 5質量%〜 5 0質量%であ ることがより好ましく、 2〇質量%〜 4 0質量%であることが特に好ましい 。 上記範囲であると、 解像度がより向上する。 It is preferably 0% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 15% by mass to 50% by mass, and particularly preferably 20% by mass to 40% by mass. Within the above range, the resolution is further improved.
重合体 Xが 2種以上の構成単位 を含む場合、 上記構成単位 の含有量は 、 2種以上の構成単位 の総含有量を表すものとする。 When the polymer X contains two or more constitutional units, the content of the constitutional unit represents the total content of the two or more constitutional units.
重合体 Xにおける構成単位 の含有量 (含有割合:質量比) は、 1 3 0 _ IV! 測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認すること ができる。 The content of the repeating unit in the polymer X (content: weight ratio) can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity is calculated by a conventional method from 1 3 0 _ IV measurement!.
[0090] -酸基を有する構成単位一 [0090]-One structural unit having an acid group
重合体 Xは、 酸基を有する構成単位 (以下、 「構成単位巳」 ともいう。 ) を含んでいてもよい。 構成単位巳は、 酸分解性基で保護されていない酸基、 〇 2020/174767 21 卩(:171?2019/044334 The polymer X may contain a constitutional unit having an acid group (hereinafter, also referred to as “constitutional unit”). The structural unit M is an acid group not protected by an acid-decomposable group, 〇2020/174767 21 卩(:171?2019/044334
すなわち、 保護基を有しない酸基を有する構成単位である。 重合体 Xが構成 単位巳を含むことで、 パターン形成時の感度が良好となり、 パターン露光後 の現像工程においてアルカリ性の現像液に溶けやすくなり、 現像時間の短縮 化を図ることができる。 That is, it is a structural unit having an acid group having no protecting group. When the polymer X contains the structural unit, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation becomes good, the polymer X easily dissolves in an alkaline developing solution in the developing step after pattern exposure, and the developing time can be shortened.
[0091 ] 構成単位巳における酸基としては、 例えば、 カルボキシ基、 スルホンアミ ド基、 ホスホン酸基、 スルホ基、 フェノール性水酸基、 及びスルホニルイミ ド基が挙げられる。 上記の中でも、 酸基は、 カルボキシ基、 又はフェノール 性水酸基であることが好ましく、 カルボキシ基であることがより好ましい。 [0091] Examples of the acid group in the structural unit include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group. Among the above, the acid group is preferably a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group, and more preferably a carboxy group.
[0092] 重合体 Xは、 1種単独の構成単位巳を含んでいてもよく、 2種以上の構成 単位巳を含んでいてもよい。 [0092] The polymer X may contain one kind of constitutional unit, or may contain two or more kinds of constitutional unit.
[0093] 重合体 Xにおける構成単位巳の含有量は、 重合体 Xの全質量に対して、 0 . 0 1質量%〜 2 0質量%であることが好ましく、 〇. 0 1質量%〜 1 0質 量%であることがより好ましく、 0 . 1質量%〜 5質量%含むことが特に好 ましい。 上記範囲であると、 解像性がより良好となる。 [0093] The content of the constitutional unit in the polymer X is preferably 0.01 mass% to 20 mass% with respect to the total mass of the polymer X, and 0.01 mass% to 1 It is more preferably 0% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass. Within the above range, the resolution becomes better.
重合体 Xが 2種以上の構成単位巳を含む場合、 上記構成単位巳の含有量は 、 2種以上の構成単位巳の総含有量を表すものとする。 When the polymer X contains two or more types of constitutional unit, the content of the above constitutional unit represents the total content of two or more types of constitutional unit.
重合体 Xにおける構成単位巳の含有量 (含有割合:質量比) は、 1 3 0 _ IV! 測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認すること ができる。 Constituent unit Snake content in the polymer X (content: weight ratio) can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity is calculated by a conventional method from 1 3 0 _ IV measurement!.
[0094] —他の構成単位一 [0094] — Other building blocks
重合体 Xは、 既述の構成単位八及び構成単位巳以外に、 他の構成単位 (以 下、 「構成単位(3」 ともいう。 ) を、 本開示に係るパターンつき基板の製造 方法の効果を損なわない範囲で含むことが好ましい。 In the polymer X, in addition to the above-mentioned structural unit 8 and structural unit M, other structural units (hereinafter, also referred to as “structural unit (3)”) are effective in the method for producing a patterned substrate according to the present disclosure. It is preferable to include in the range which does not impair.
[0095] 構成単位〇を形成するモノマーとしては、 制限されず、 例えば、 スチレン 化合物、 (メタ) アクリル酸アルキルェステル、 (メタ) アクリル酸環状ア ルキルェステル、 (メタ) アクリル酸アリールェステル、 不飽和ジカルボン 酸ジェステル、 ビシクロ不飽和化合物、 マレイミ ド化合物、 不飽和芳香族化 合物、 共役ジェン系化合物、 不飽和モノカルボン酸、 不飽和ジカルボン酸、 〇 2020/174767 22 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0095] The monomer forming the structural unit 〇 is not limited, and examples thereof include a styrene compound, (meth)acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth)acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth)acrylic acid aryl ester, and Saturated dicarboxylic acid gestels, Bicyclo unsaturated compounds, Maleimide compounds, Unsaturated aromatic compounds, Conjugated gen compounds, Unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, Unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, 〇2020/174767 22 卩(:171?2019/044334
不飽和ジカルボン酸無水物、 脂肪族環式骨格を有する不飽和化合物、 及びそ の他の不飽和化合物が挙げられる。 Examples thereof include unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides, unsaturated compounds having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, and other unsaturated compounds.
[0096] 構成単位〇の種類及び含有量の少なくともいずれかを調整することで、 重 合体 Xの諸特性を調整することができる。 特に、 構成単位(3を含むことで、 重合体 Xのガラス転移温度、 酸価、 及び親水性又は疎水性を容易に調整する ことができる。 [0096] By adjusting at least one of the type and content of the structural unit O, various characteristics of the polymer X can be adjusted. In particular, by including the structural unit (3, the glass transition temperature, acid value, and hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity of the polymer X can be easily adjusted.
[0097] 構成単位〇としては、 例えば、 スチレン、 《 -メチルスチレン、 アセトキ シスチレン、 メ トキシスチレン、 エトキシスチレン、 クロロスチレン、 ビニ ル安息香酸メチル、 ビニル安息香酸エチル、 (メタ) アクリル酸メチル、 ( メタ) アクリル酸エチル、 (メタ) アクリル酸 1·! -プロピル、 (メタ) アク リル酸イソプロピル、 (メタ) アクリル酸 1·! -ブチル、 (メタ) アクリル酸 2—エチルヘキシル、 (メタ) アクリル酸 2—ヒドロキシエチル、 (メタ) アクリル酸 2 -ヒドロキシプロピル、 (メタ) アクリル酸ベンジル、 (メタ ) アクリル酸シクロペンチル、 (メタ) アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、 (メタ ) アクリル酸イソボルニル、 アクリロニトリル、 又はエチレングリコールモ ノアセトアセテートモノ (メタ) アクリレートを重合して形成される構成単 位が挙げられる。 また、 構成単位〇としては、 特開 2 0 0 4 - 2 6 4 6 2 3 号公報の段落〇〇 2 1〜段落 0 0 2 4に記載された化合物を重合して形成さ れる構成単位が挙げられる。 As the structural unit 〇, for example, styrene, <<-methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinyl benzoate, ethyl vinyl benzoate, (meth)methyl acrylate, ( (Meth)ethyl acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid 1·!-propyl, (meth)isopropyl acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid 1·!-butyl, (meth)acrylic acid 2-ethylhexyl, (meth)acrylic acid 2-hydroxyethyl, (meth)acrylic acid 2-hydroxypropyl, (meth)benzyl acrylate, (meth)cyclopentyl acrylate, (meth)cyclohexyl acrylate, (meth)isobornyl acrylate, acrylonitrile, or ethylene glycol mono A constituent unit formed by polymerizing acetoacetate mono(meth)acrylate may be mentioned. Further, as the structural unit 〇, a structural unit formed by polymerizing the compounds described in paragraphs 〇 〇 21 to paragraph 0 024 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2 0 4 2 6 4 6 2 3 Can be mentioned.
[0098] 構成単位(3は、 解像性の観点から、 塩基性基を有する構成単位を含むこと が好ましい。 From the viewpoint of resolution, it is preferable that the structural unit (3 includes a structural unit having a basic group.
上記塩基性基としては、 例えば、 窒素原子を有する基が挙げられる。 窒素 原子を有する基としては、 例えば、 脂肪族アミノ基、 芳香族アミノ基、 及び 含窒素複素芳香環基が挙げられ、 脂肪族アミノ基が好ましい。 Examples of the basic group include groups having a nitrogen atom. Examples of the group having a nitrogen atom include an aliphatic amino group, an aromatic amino group, and a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group, and an aliphatic amino group is preferable.
脂肪族アミノ基としては、 第一級アミノ基、 第二級アミノ基、 又は第三級 アミノ基のいずれであってもよいが、 解像性の観点から、 第二級アミノ基、 又は第三級アミノ基が好ましい。 The aliphatic amino group may be any of a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, or a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoint of resolution, a secondary amino group, or a tertiary amino group A primary amino group is preferred.
[0099] 塩基性基を有する構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、 例えば、 メタク 〇 2020/174767 23 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0099] Examples of the monomer forming the structural unit having a basic group include, for example, 〇 2020/174767 23 卩 (:171?2019/044334
リル酸 1 , 2 , 2 , 6 , 6 -ペンタメチルー 4 -ピペリジル、 メタクリル酸 2 - (ジメチルアミノ) エチル、 アクリル酸 2 , 2 , 6 , 6—テトラメチルPhosphoric acid 1, 2, 2, 6, 6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl, 2-(dimethylamino)ethyl methacrylate, acrylic acid 2, 2, 6, 6-tetramethyl
- 4 -ピペリジル、 メタクリル酸 2 , 2 , 6 , 6 -テトラメチルー 4 -ピぺ リジル、 アクリル酸 2 , 2 , 6 , 6—テトラメチルー 4—ピペリジル、 メタ クリル酸 2 - (ジエチルアミノ) エチル、 アクリル酸 2 - (ジメチルアミノ ) エチル、 アクリル酸 2 - (ジエチルアミノ) エチル、 メタクリル酸 1\! - ( 3—ジメチルアミノ) プロピル、 アクリル酸 1\! _ (3—ジメチルアミノ) プ ロピル、 メタクリル酸 1\! - (3 -ジエチルアミノ) プロピル、 アクリル酸 - (3—ジエチルアミノ) プロピル、 メタクリル酸 2— (ジイソプロピルア ミノ) エチル、 メタクリル酸 2 -モルホリノエチル、 アクリル酸 2 -モルホ リノエチル、 1\1 _ [ 3— (ジメチルアミノ) プロピル] アクリルアミ ド、 4 —アミノスチレン、 4—ビニルピリジン、 2—ビニルピリジン、 3—ビニル ピリジン、 1 —ビニルイミダゾール、 2—メチルー 1 —ビニルイミダゾール 、 1 —アリルイミダゾール、 及び 1 —ビニルー 1 , 2 , 4—トリアゾールが 挙げられる。 上記の中でも、 メタクリル酸 1 , 2 , 2 , 6 , 6 -ペンタメチ ルー 4—ピペリジルが好ましい。 -4-Piperidyl, 2,2,6,6-Tetramethyl-4-piperidyl Methacrylate, 2,2,6,6-Tetramethyl-4-piperidyl Acrylate, 2-(Diethylamino)ethyl methacrylate, 2 Acrylate -(Dimethylamino) ethyl, acrylic acid 2-(diethylamino) ethyl, methacrylic acid 1\!-(3 -dimethylamino) propyl, acrylic acid 1\! _ (3 -dimethylamino)propyl, methacrylic acid 1\! -(3-Diethylamino)propyl, acrylic acid-(3-diethylamino)propyl, methacrylic acid 2-(diisopropylamino)ethyl, methacrylic acid 2-morpholinoethyl, acrylate 2-morpholinoethyl, 1\1 _ [3— (Dimethylamino)propyl] acrylic amide, 4-aminostyrene, 4-vinylpyridine, 2-vinylpyridine, 3-vinylpyridine, 1-vinylimidazole, 2-methyl-1-vinylimidazole, 1-allylimidazole, and 1 —Vinyl-1,2,4-triazole may be mentioned. Among these, 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl 4-piperidyl methacrylate is preferable.
[0100] また、 構成単位(3は、 感光性転写材料の電気特性を向上させる観点から、 芳香環を有する構成単位、 又は脂肪族環式骨格を有する構成単位であること が好ましい。 上記各構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、 例えば、 スチレ ン、 《—メチルスチレン、 ジシクロペンタニル (メタ) アクリレート、 シク ロペンチル (メタ) アクリレート、 シクロヘキシル (メタ) アクリレート、 イソボルニル (メタ) アクリレート、 及びベンジル (メタ) アクリレートが 挙げられ、 シクロヘキシル (メタ) アクリレートが好ましい。 [0100] Further, the structural unit (3 is preferably a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, from the viewpoint of improving the electrical characteristics of the photosensitive transfer material. Examples of the monomer that forms the unit include styrene, <<-methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth)acrylate, cyclopentyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, isobornyl (meth)acrylate, and benzyl (meth)acrylate. ) Acrylate is mentioned, and cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate is preferable.
[0101 ] また、 構成単位 <3を形成するモノマーは、 密着性の観点から、 (メタ) ア クリル酸アルキルエステルであることが好ましい。 上記の中でも、 密着性の 観点から、 炭素数 4〜 1 2のアルキル基を有する (メタ) アクリル酸アルキ ルエステルがより好ましい。 具体的には、 (メタ) アクリル酸メチル、 (メ 夕) アクリル酸エチル、 (メタ) アクリル酸プロピル、 (メタ) アクリル酸 〇 2020/174767 24 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0101] Further, the monomer forming the structural unit <3 is preferably a (meth)acrylic acid alkyl ester from the viewpoint of adhesion. Among the above, (meth)acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Specifically, (meth)methyl acrylate, (meth)ethyl acrylate, (meth)propyl acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid 〇 2020/174767 24 卩 (:171?2019/044334
门ーブチル、 及び (メタ) アクリル酸 2 -エチルヘキシルが挙げられる。 Examples thereof include 2-butylhexyl butyl, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate.
[0102] 重合体 Xは、 1種単独の構成単位<3を含んでいてもよく、 2種以上の構成 単位〇を含んでいてもよい。 [0102] The polymer X may contain one kind of constitutional unit <3, or may contain two or more kinds of constitutional unit ◯.
[0103] 構成単位<3の含有量は、 重合体 Xの全質量に対し、 9 0質量%以下が好ま しく、 8 5質量%以下がより好ましく、 8 0質量%以下が特に好ましい。 構 成単位〇の含有量は、 1 0質量%以上であることが好ましく、 2 0質量%以 上であることがより好ましい。 上記範囲であると、 解像度及び密着性がより 向上する。 [0103] The content of the structural unit <3 is preferably 90% by mass or less, more preferably 85% by mass or less, particularly preferably 80% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the polymer X. The content of the structural unit ◯ is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and the adhesiveness are further improved.
重合体 Xが 2種以上の構成単位<3を含む場合、 上記構成単位<3の含有量は 、 2種以上の構成単位(3の総含有量を表すものとする。 When the polymer X contains two or more kinds of constitutional units <3, the content of the constitutional units <3 represents two or more kinds of constitutional units (the total content of 3).
[0104] 以下、 本開示における重合体 Xの好ましい例を挙げるが、 本開示は以下の 例示に限定されない。 なお、 下記例示化合物における構成単位の比率、 重量 平均分子量は、 好ましい物性を得るために適宜選択される。 [0104] Hereinafter, preferred examples of the polymer X in the present disclosure will be given, but the present disclosure is not limited to the following examples. The ratio of the constituent units and the weight average molecular weight in the following exemplified compounds are appropriately selected to obtain preferable physical properties.
[0105] [0105]
Figure imgf000027_0001
〇 2020/174767 26 卩(:171?2019/044334
Figure imgf000027_0001
〇 2020/174767 26 卩 (:171?2019/044334
[0106] _重合体 Xの製造方法一 [0106] _ Method for producing polymer X
重合体 Xの製造方法 (合成法) は、 制限されない。 重合体 Xは、 例えば、 構成単位 を形成するためのモノマー、 さらに必要に応じて、 構成単位巳を 形成するためのモノマー及び構成単位〇を形成するためのモノマーを含む有 機溶剤中、 重合開始剤を用いて重合することにより合成することができる。 また、 重合体 Xは、 いわゆる高分子反応で合成することもできる。 The production method (synthesis method) of the polymer X is not limited. The polymer X is, for example, a monomer for forming the structural unit, and further, if necessary, in an organic solvent containing a monomer for forming the structural unit and a monomer for forming the structural unit 〇, initiating the polymerization. It can be synthesized by polymerizing with an agent. The polymer X can also be synthesized by a so-called polymer reaction.
[0107] また、 酸分解性樹脂 (好ましくは重合体 X) は、 解像性の観点から、 炭素 数 1〜 3の直鎖状アルキル基をエステル位に有する (メタ) アクリレート化 合物、 炭素数 1〜 3の分岐状アルキル基をエステル位に有する (メタ) アク リレート化合物、 炭素数 4〜 2 0の環状アルキル基をエステル位に有する ( メタ) アクリレート化合物、 及び炭素数 4〜 2 0の環状エーテル基をエステ ル位に有する (メタ) アクリレート化合物よりなる群から選択される少なく とも 1種の (メタ) アクリレート化合物由来の構成単位を含むことが好まし い。 [0107] In addition, the acid-decomposable resin (preferably the polymer X) is a (meth)acrylate compound having a linear alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position from the viewpoint of resolution. A (meth)acrylate compound having a branched alkyl group of the number 1 to 3 at the ester position, a (meth)acrylate compound having a cyclic alkyl group having a carbon number of 4 to 20 at the ester position, and a compound having a carbon number of 4 to 20 It is preferable to include a structural unit derived from at least one (meth)acrylate compound selected from the group consisting of (meth)acrylate compounds having a cyclic ether group at the ester position.
[0108] ここで、 本開示において使用される 「エステル位」 との用語について、 以 下説明する。 「八をエステル位に有する」 という表現は、 八がエステル結合 (- 0 (=〇) - 0 -) の酸素原子側の結合部位 (一〇一) に結合している こと、 すなわち、 「一〇 (=〇) 一〇一八」 で表される構造を有することを 意味する。 例えば、 「炭素数 1〜 3の直鎖状アルキル基をエステル位に有す る」 とは、 炭素数 1〜 3の直鎖状アルキル基がエステル結合の酸素原子側の 結合部位に結合していることを意味する。 そして、 炭素数 1〜 3の直鎖状ア ルキル基を乂で表すと、 「炭素数 1〜 3の直鎖状アルキル基をエステル位に 有する」 とは、 「一〇 (=〇) 一〇一 X」 で表される構造を有することを意 味する。 [0108] Here, the term "ester position" used in the present disclosure will be described below. The expression “having eight in the ester position” means that eight is bonded to the bonding site (101) on the oxygen atom side of the ester bond (−0 (= 〇)-0 −), that is, “one 〇 (= 〇) 108” means that the structure is represented. For example, “having a straight-chain alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position” means that a straight-chain alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is bonded to the bond site on the oxygen atom side of the ester bond. Means that Further, when a straight-chain alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is represented, "having a straight-chain alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position" means "10 (= 〇) 10 It means having a structure represented by "1 X".
[0109] 上記 (メタ) アクリレート化合物由来の構成単位において、 炭素数 4〜 2 [0109] In the structural unit derived from the (meth)acrylate compound, the number of carbon atoms is 4 to 2
0の環状アルキル基は、 炭素数 4〜 1 0の環状アルキル基であることが好ま しく、 炭素数 5〜 8の環状アルキル基であることがより好ましく、 シクロへ キシル基であることが特に好ましい。 〇 2020/174767 27 卩(:171?2019/044334 The cyclic alkyl group having 0 carbon atoms is preferably a cyclic alkyl group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 8 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a cyclohexyl group. .. 〇 2020/174767 27 卩 (:171?2019/044334
[01 10] 上記 (メタ) アクリレート化合物由来の構成単位において、 炭素数 4〜 2 [0110] In the structural unit derived from the (meth)acrylate compound, the number of carbon atoms is 4 to 2
0の環状エーテル基は、 炭素数 4〜 1 0の環状エーテル基であることが好ま しく、 炭素数 5〜 8の環状エーテル基であることがより好ましく、 テトラヒ ドロフラニル基、 又はテトラヒドロピラニル基であることがさらに好ましく 、 テトラヒドロフラニル基であることが特に好ましい。 The cyclic ether group having 0 carbon atoms is preferably a cyclic ether group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably a cyclic ether group having 5 to 8 carbon atoms, a tetrahydrofuranyl group, or a tetrahydropyranyl group. Is more preferable, and a tetrahydrofuranyl group is particularly preferable.
[01 1 1 ] 上記 (メタ) アクリレート化合物由来の構成単位の含有量は、 酸分解性樹 脂の全質量に対して 9 0質量%以上であることが好ましく、 9 5質量%以上 であることがより好ましい。 上記 (メタ) アクリレート化合物由来の構成単 位の含有量の上限は、 制限されない。 上記 (メタ) アクリレート化合物由来 の構成単位の含有量は、 酸分解性樹脂の全質量に対して、 例えば、 1 0 0質 量%以下の範囲で適宜設定すればよい。 [01 11] The content of the structural unit derived from the (meth)acrylate compound is preferably 90% by mass or more, and more preferably 95% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the acid-decomposable resin. Is more preferable. The upper limit of the content of the constituent unit derived from the (meth)acrylate compound is not limited. The content of the structural unit derived from the (meth)acrylate compound may be appropriately set in the range of, for example, 100 mass% or less with respect to the total mass of the acid-decomposable resin.
[01 12] 酸分解性樹脂 (好ましくは重合体 X) は、 解像性の観点から、 アクリル酸 、 及びアクリレート化合物よりなる群から選択される少なくとも 1種のアク リル化合物由来の構成単位を含むことが好ましい。 [0112] The acid-decomposable resin (preferably the polymer X) contains a structural unit derived from at least one acrylic compound selected from the group consisting of acrylic acid, and an acrylate compound from the viewpoint of resolution. It is preferable.
[01 13] アクリレート化合物由来の構成単位としては、 制限されず、 例えば、 既述 の各種アクリレート化合物由来の構成単位が挙げられる。 [0113] The constituent unit derived from the acrylate compound is not limited, and examples thereof include constituent units derived from the various acrylate compounds described above.
[01 14] 上記アクリル化合物由来の構成単位の含有量は、 酸分解性樹脂の全質量に 対して、 〇質量%〜 4 0質量%であることが好ましく、 0質量%〜 3 0質量 %であることがより好ましく、 5質量%〜 3 0質量%であることが特に好ま しい。 [0114] The content of the structural unit derived from the acrylic compound is preferably 0% by mass to 40% by mass, and 0% by mass to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the acid-decomposable resin. It is more preferable that the amount is 5% by mass to 30% by mass.
[01 15] 上記の中でも、 酸分解性樹脂 (好ましくは重合体 X) は、 炭素数 1〜 3の 直鎖状アルキル基をエステル位に有する (メタ) アクリレート化合物、 炭素 数 1〜 3の分岐状アルキル基をエステル位に有する (メタ) アクリレート化 合物、 炭素数 4〜 2 0の環状アルキル基をエステル位に有する (メタ) アク リレート化合物、 及び炭素数 4〜 2 0の環状エーテル基をエステル位に有す る (メタ) アクリレート化合物よりなる群から選択される少なくとも 1種の (メタ) アクリレート化合物由来の構成単位を上記酸分解性樹脂の全質量に 対して 9 0質量%以上含み、 かつ、 アクリル酸、 及びアクリレート化合物よ 〇 2020/174767 28 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0115] Among the above, the acid-decomposable resin (preferably the polymer X) is a (meth)acrylate compound having a linear alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at the ester position, and a branched chain having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. A (meth)acrylate compound having a cyclic alkyl group at the ester position, a (meth)acrylate compound having a cyclic alkyl group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms at the ester position, and a cyclic ether group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms Containing 90% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the acid-decomposable resin, at least one structural unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound selected from the group consisting of (meth)acrylate compounds in the ester position, And acrylic acid and acrylate compounds 〇 2020/174767 28 卩 (:171?2019/044334
りなる群から選択される少なくとも 1種のアクリル化合物由来の構成単位を 上記酸分解性樹脂の全質量に対して〇質量%〜 30質量%含むことが好まし い。 酸分解性樹脂が上記構成単位を特定の比率で含むことで、 解像性を向上 でき、 また、 酸分解樹脂性のガラス転移温度を所望の数値範囲に調整するこ ともできる。 It is preferable that the constituent unit derived from at least one acrylic compound selected from the group consisting of When the acid-decomposable resin contains the above structural units in a specific ratio, the resolution can be improved and the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin can be adjusted within a desired numerical range.
[0116] (ガラス転移温度) [0116] (Glass transition temperature)
酸分解性樹脂 (好ましくは重合体 X) のガラス転移温度は、 50°〇以上で あり、 55 °〇以上であることが好ましく、 60 °〇以上であることがより好ま しく、 70°〇以上であることがさらに好ましく、 80°〇以上であることが特 に好ましい。 酸分解性樹脂のガラス転移温度が 50°〇以上であることで、 露 光後において感光性樹脂組成物層中の酸の拡散を抑制できるため、 感光性樹 脂組成物層の過剰な酸分解反応を抑制できる。 このため、 露光後の時間経過 によるパターンの線幅の減少を抑制できる。 The glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin (preferably polymer X) is 50 ° 〇 or higher, preferably 55° 〇 or higher, more preferably 60° 〇 or higher, and 70° 〇 or higher. Is more preferable, and it is particularly preferable that it is 80° or more. When the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is 50 ° 〇 or higher, the acid diffusion in the photosensitive resin composition layer can be suppressed after exposure to light, resulting in excessive acid decomposition of the photosensitive resin composition layer. The reaction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after the exposure.
[0117] 酸分解性樹脂のガラス転移温度は、 1 1 0°〇以下であることが好ましく、 [0117] The glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is preferably 110 ° C or less,
1 00 °〇以下であることがより好ましく、 90 °〇以下であることがさらに好 ましい。 85 °〇以下であることが特に好ましく、 80°〇以下であることが最 も好ましい。 酸分解性樹脂のガラス転移温度が 1 1 〇°〇以下であることで、 高温条件下でラミネート適性を向上できる。 It is more preferably 100° or less, and even more preferably 90° or less. It is particularly preferable that it is 85° or less, and most preferably 80° or less. When the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is 1100 ° or less, the suitability for lamination can be improved under high temperature conditions.
[0118] 上記の中でも、 酸分解性樹脂のガラス転移温度は、 50°〇~90°〇である ことが好ましく、 55°〇〜90°〇であることがより好ましく、 55°〇〜85 °〇であることがさらに好ましく、 60°〇~85 °〇であることが特に好ましく 、 60°〇~80°〇であることが最も好ましい。 分解性樹脂のガラス転移温度 が上記数値範囲内であることで、 露光後の時間経過によるバターンの線幅の 減少を抑制でき、 かつ、 高温条件下でラミネート適性を向上できる。 [0118] Among the above, the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is preferably from 50 ° 〇 ~ 90 ° 〇, more preferably from 55 ° 〇_~90 ° 〇, 55 ° 〇_~85 ° O is more preferable, 60° O to 85° O is particularly preferable, and 60 ° to 80 ° O is most preferable. When the glass transition temperature of the decomposable resin is within the above numerical range, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after exposure, and it is possible to improve the suitability for lamination under high temperature conditions.
[0119] 酸分解性樹脂のガラス転移温度は、 」 丨 3 < 7 1 2 1 : 1 987に記 載された方法に準ずる方法で測定する。 本開示におけるガラス転移温度は、 補外ガラス転移開始温度 (以下、 「丁 丨 9」 ともいう。 ) を用いる。 [0119] The glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is measured by a method according to the method described in "3 <7 1 2 1 :1 987". As the glass transition temperature in the present disclosure, an extrapolated glass transition start temperature (hereinafter, also referred to as “Chapter 9”) is used.
ガラス転移温度を測定する場合、 予想される酸分解性樹脂のガラス転移温 〇 2020/174767 29 卩(:171?2019/044334 When measuring the glass transition temperature, the expected glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin 〇2020/174767 29 卩(:171?2019/044334
度より約 50°〇低い温度にて測定装置が安定するまで保持した後、 加熱速度 : 20°〇/分で、 ガラス転移が終了した温度よりも約 30°〇高い温度まで加 熱し、 示差熱分析 (口丁 ) 曲線又は示差走査熱量 (030 曲線を描かせ る。 補外ガラス転移開始温度 (丁 丨 9) 、 すなわち、 本開示におけるガラス 転移温度は、 口丁 曲線又は 03(3曲線における低温側のベースラインを高 温側に延長した直線と、 ガラス転移の階段状変化部分の曲線の勾配が最大に なる点で引いた接線との交点の温度として求める。 After maintaining the measuring device at a temperature about 50° below the temperature until it stabilizes, heat at a heating rate of 20°/min to a temperature about 30° above the temperature at which the glass transition ends Analysis (original) Curve or differential scanning calorific value (Draw the 030 curve. Extrapolation glass transition onset temperature (Diagram 9), that is, the glass transition temperature in the present disclosure is as follows. It is calculated as the temperature at the intersection of the straight line extending the side baseline to the high temperature side and the tangent line drawn at the point where the slope of the curve of the step transition of the glass transition becomes maximum.
[0120] 本開示において、 酸分解性樹脂のガラス転移温度を調整する方法としては 、 例えば、 〇乂式を指針にしてガラス転移温度を調整する方法が挙げられ る。 〇乂式によれば、 目的とする酸分解性樹脂を構成する各構成単位の単 独重合体のガラス転移温度、 及び各構成単位の質量比に基づいて、 酸分解性 樹脂のガラス転移温度を調整できる。 [0120] In the present disclosure, as a method of adjusting the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin, for example, a method of adjusting the glass transition temperature using the equation (10) as a guideline can be mentioned. According to the formula, the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin can be calculated based on the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of each constitutional unit constituting the desired acid-decomposable resin and the mass ratio of each constitutional unit. Can be adjusted.
[0121] 以下、 〇乂式について、 第 1の構成単位と第 2の構成単位とを含む共重 合体を例に説明する。 [0121] Hereinafter, the formula will be described by taking a co-polymer including the first constitutional unit and the second constitutional unit as an example.
[0122] 第 1の構成単位の単独重合体の丁 9を丁 9 1、 共重合体における第 1の構 成単位の質量分率を 1、 第 2の構成単位の単独重合体の丁 9を丁 92とし 、 共重合体における第 2の構成単位の質量分率を \^/2とした場合、 第 1の構 成単位と第 2の構成単位とを含む共重合体の丁 90 (< :ケルビン) は、 以 下の式にしたがって推定することが可能である。 [0122] homopolymers sheets 9 1 Ding 9 of the first structural unit, the mass fraction of the first configuration unit in the copolymer 1, a homopolymer of sheets 9 of the second structural unit and Ding 9 2, when the mass fraction of the second structural unit in the copolymer and \ ^ / 2, a copolymer of Ding 90 including first and configuration unit and a second constitutional unit (< : Kelvin) can be estimated according to the following formula.
〇乂式: 1 /丁 90= (\^/1 /丁 9 1) 十 (\^/2/丁 92) 既述の 〇乂式を用いて、 共重合体を構成する各構成単位の種類及び質量 分率を調整して、 所望のガラス転移温度を有する共重合体を得ることができ る。 ○ Formula: 1 / Ding 9 0 = (\^/1 / Ding 9 1) 10 (\^/2/Ding 9 2) Using the above-mentioned formula, each structural unit that constitutes the copolymer It is possible to obtain a copolymer having a desired glass transition temperature by adjusting the type and mass fraction of.
[0123] また、 酸分解性樹脂の重量平均分子量を調整することにより、 酸分解性樹 脂のガラス転移温度を調整することも可能である。 [0123] It is also possible to adjust the glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the acid-decomposable resin.
[0124] -酸価_ [0124] -Acid value_
酸分解性樹脂 (好ましくは重合体 X) の酸価は、 0 9 <01~1/9〜 50 1119
Figure imgf000031_0001
であることが好ましく、
Figure imgf000031_0002
〇 2020/174767 30 卩(:171?2019/044334
The acid value of the acid-decomposable resin (preferably polymer X) is 0 9 <01 ~ 1/9 ~ 50 1119
Figure imgf000031_0001
Is preferred,
Figure imgf000031_0002
〇 2020/174767 30 卩 (:171?2019/044334
であることがより好ましく、 0〇19 [<〇1~1/9~ 1 0〇19 [<〇1~1/9で あることが特に好ましい。 酸分解性樹脂の酸価が上記数値範囲内であること で、 感光性樹脂組成物層に水が浸入しにくいため、 露光されていない感光性 樹脂組成物層の過剰な加水分解反応を抑制できる。 このため、 パターンの線 幅の減少を抑制できる。 More preferably, particularly preferably 0_Rei_19 <Rei_1 ~ 1/9 ~ 1 0_Rei_19 <Rei_1 ~ 1/9. When the acid value of the acid-decomposable resin is within the above numerical range, it is difficult for water to penetrate into the photosensitive resin composition layer, and therefore excessive hydrolysis reaction of the unexposed photosensitive resin composition layer can be suppressed. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the line width of the pattern.
[0125] 本開示において、 酸価は、 測定試料 1 9あたりの酸性成分を中和するのに 要する水酸化カリウムの質量を表したものである。 具体的には、 測定試料を テトラヒドロフラン/水 =9/1 (体積比) 混合溶媒に溶解した後、 電位差 滴定装置 (例えば、 丁_5 1 0、 京都電子工業株式会社製) を用いて、 得 られた溶液を 25 °〇において、 〇.
Figure imgf000032_0001
[0125] In the present disclosure, the acid value represents the mass of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize the acidic component per measurement sample 19. Specifically, the measurement sample was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran/water=9/1 (volume ratio) mixed solvent, and then obtained using a potentiometric titrator (for example, Ding_510, manufactured by Kyoto Electronics Manufacturing Co., Ltd.). The resulting solution at 25 ° 〇.
Figure imgf000032_0001
中和滴定する。 滴定 1~1曲線の変曲点を滴定終点として、 次式により酸価を 算出する。 Neutralization Titrate. Using the inflection point of the titration 1 to 1 curves as the end point of titration, calculate the acid value by the following formula.
式: 八= 56· 1 1 X V 3 X 0. 1 1:/\« Formula: Eight = 56· 1 1 XV 3 X 0. 1 1 : /\«
八 :酸価 ( 019 [<〇 1~1 / 9) Eight: Acid value (019 [< 〇 1 to 1/9)
V 3 :滴定に要した〇. 1 01〇 丨
Figure imgf000032_0002
-水酸化ナトリウム水溶液の使用量 ( 011_)
V 3: Required for titration 〇 .01 01 〇 丨
Figure imgf000032_0002
-Amount of sodium hydroxide used (011_)
干 : 〇.
Figure imgf000032_0003
水酸化ナトリウム水溶液の力価
Dry: 〇.
Figure imgf000032_0003
Potency of aqueous sodium hydroxide solution
% :測定試料の質量 ( 9) (固形分換算) %: Mass of measurement sample (9) (solid content conversion)
[0126] _分子量一 [0126] _ one molecular weight
酸分解性樹脂 (好ましくは重合体 X) の分子量は、 ポリスチレン換算重量 平均分子量で、 60, 000以下であることが好ましい。 酸分解性樹脂の重 量平均分子量が 60, 000以下であることで、 感光性転写材料をポリイミ ド基板に貼り合わせる際においてポリイミ ド基板の膜質の劣化を抑制できる 温度範囲 (例えば 1 50°〇以下) での貼り合わせを実現することができる。 また、 酸分解性樹脂の重量平均分子量は、 2, 000〜 60, 000であ ることが好ましく、 3, 000〜 50, 000であることがより好ましい。 重合体 Xの数平均分子量と重量平均分子量との比 (分散度) は、 1. 〇〜 5. 0が好ましく、 1. 05〜 3. 5がより好ましい。 〇 2020/174767 31 卩(:171?2019/044334 The molecular weight of the acid-decomposable resin (preferably the polymer X) is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of polystyrene weight average molecular weight. When the weight average molecular weight of the acid-decomposable resin is 60,000 or less, the temperature range (for example, 150 ° 〇) where the deterioration of the film quality of the polyimide substrate can be suppressed when the photosensitive transfer material is bonded to the polyimide substrate . The following) can be used for bonding. The weight average molecular weight of the acid-decomposable resin is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, more preferably 3,000 to 50,000. The ratio (dispersion degree) of the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the polymer X is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, and more preferably 1.05 to 3.5. 〇2020/174767 31 卩(:171?2019/044334
[0127] 本開示において、 酸分解性樹脂の重量平均分子量は、 G PC (ゲルパーミ エーシヨンクロマトグラフィー) によって測定する。 測定装置としては、 様 々な市販の装置を用いることができ、 装置の内容、 及び測定技術は当業者に 公知である。 [0127] In the present disclosure, the weight average molecular weight of the acid-decomposable resin is measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography). As the measuring device, various commercially available devices can be used, and the contents of the device and the measuring technique are known to those skilled in the art.
ゲルパーミエーシヨンクロマトグラフィ (G PC) による重量平均分子量 の測定において、 測定装置としては、 H L C (登録商標) 一8220G PC (東ソー株式会社製) を用いる。 カラムとしては、 TS K g e I (登録商標 ) S u p e r H ZM— M (4. 6mm I D X 1 5 c m、 東ソー株式会社製 ) 、 S u p e r H Z 4000 (4. 6mm l DX l 5 c m、 東ソー株式会 社製) 、 S u p e r H Z 3000 (4. 6mm l DX l 5 c m、 東ソー株 式会社製) 、 及び S u p e r H Z 2000 (4. 6mm l DX l 5 c m、 東ソー株式会社製) をそれぞれ 1本、 直列に連結したものを用いる。 溶離液 としては、 TH F (テトラヒドロフラン) を用いる。 In the measurement of the weight average molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC), HLC (registered trademark)-1820GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) is used as a measuring device. The columns are TS Kge I (registered trademark) Super H ZM— M (4.6 mm IDX 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), Super HZ 4000 (4.6 mm l DX l 5 cm, Tosoh Stock Association). Supper HZ 3000 (4.6 mm l DX l 5 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and Super HZ 2000 (4.6 mm l DX l 5 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) Use those connected in series. Use THF (tetrahydrofuran) as the eluent.
また、 測定条件としては、 試料濃度を 0. 2質量%、 流速を 0. 35 mL /分、 サンプル注入量を 1 〇M L、 及び測定温度を 40°Cとする。 検出器と しては、 示差屈折率 (R 丨) 検出器を用いる。 As the measurement conditions, the sample concentration is 0.2% by mass, the flow rate is 0.35 mL/min, the sample injection amount is 10 ML, and the measurement temperature is 40 ° C. A differential refractive index (R) detector is used as the detector.
検量線は、 東ソー株式会社製の 「標準試料 T S K s t a n d a r d, p o l y s t y r e n e」 : 「F— 40」 、 「F— 20」 、 「F— 4」 、 「F - 1」 、 「A-5000」 、 「A-2500」 及び 「A- 1 000」 の 7サ ンプルのいずれかを用いて作製できる。 The calibration curve is “standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F—40”, “F—20”, “F—4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “A” -2500" and "A-1 000" can be manufactured using either of the 7 samples.
[0128] (含有量) [0128] (Content)
感光性樹脂組成物層は、 1種単独の酸分解性樹脂を含有していてもよく、 The photosensitive resin composition layer may contain one type of acid-decomposable resin alone,
2種以上の酸分解性樹脂を含有していてもよい。 酸分解性樹脂の含有量は、 密着性の観点から、 感光性樹脂組成物層の全質量に対し、 50質量%〜 99 . 9質量%であることが好ましく、 70質量%〜 98質量%であることが好 ましい。 It may contain two or more acid-decomposable resins. From the viewpoint of adhesion, the content of the acid-decomposable resin is preferably 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass, and 70% by mass to 98% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition layer. I like to have it.
[0129] (他の重合体) [0129] (Other polymers)
感光性樹脂組成物層は、 酸分解性樹脂に加え、 酸分解性基で保護された酸 〇 2020/174767 32 卩(:171?2019/044334 The photosensitive resin composition layer contains an acid-decomposable resin and an acid protected by an acid-decomposable group. 〇 2020/174767 32 卩 (:171?2019/044334
基を有する構成単位を含まない重合体 (以下、 「他の重合体」 ともいう。 ) を含有していてもよい。 本開示においては、 酸分解性樹脂及び他の重合体を あわせて、 「重合体成分」 ともいう。 なお、 後述する架橋剤、 分散剤及び界 面活性剤に該当する化合物は、 高分子化合物であっても、 重合体成分に含ま ないものとする。 It may contain a polymer not containing a constitutional unit having a group (hereinafter, also referred to as “other polymer”). In the present disclosure, the acid-decomposable resin and the other polymer are collectively referred to as “polymer component”. The compounds corresponding to the crosslinking agent, dispersant and surface active agent described later, even if they are polymer compounds, shall not be included in the polymer component.
[0130] 他の重合体としては、 例えば、 ポリヒドロキシスチレンが挙げられる。 市 販されているポリヒドロキシスチレンとしては、 例えば、 31\/1八 1 000 、 31\/1八 2000 、 31\/1八 3000 、 31\/1八 1 440 、 31\/1 八 1 7352 、 31\/1八 26259.及び 3 IV!八 3840 (以上、 サートマー社製) 、
Figure imgf000034_0001
11〇一3000、
Figure imgf000034_0002
11〇_
Figure imgf000034_0003
[0130] Examples of other polymers include polyhydroxystyrene. Examples of commercially available polyhydroxystyrenes are 31\/1 8 1 000, 31\/1 8 2000, 31\/1 8 3000, 31\/1 8 1 440, 31\/1 8 1 7352 , 31\/1 Hachi 26259. and 3 IV! Hachi 3840 (above, manufactured by Sartomer),
Figure imgf000034_0001
11 001 3000,
Figure imgf000034_0002
110_
Figure imgf000034_0003
\ ARU FON 11〇一3920、 及び八 II 〇 II〇一 3080 (以 上、 東亞合成株式会社製) 、 並びに」 〇门〇 「ソ 1 690、 」 〇门〇 「ソ I 678、
Figure imgf000034_0004
586 (以上、 巳八3 社製) が挙げられる。
\ ARU FON 11 〇 3920, and Hachi II 〇 II 〇 1 3080 (hereinafter, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and ”门 〇 “So 1690,” 〇 门 〇 “So I 678,
Figure imgf000034_0004
586 (above, manufactured by three Minahachi companies).
[0131] 感光性樹脂組成物層は、 1種単独の他の重合体を含有していてもよく、 2 種以上の他の重合体を含有していてもよい。 [0131] The photosensitive resin composition layer may contain one kind of another polymer alone, or may contain two or more kinds of other polymers.
[0132] 感光性樹脂組成物層が他の重合体を含有する場合、 他の重合体の含有量は 、 重合体成分の全質量に対して、 50質量%以下であることが好ましく、 3 〇質量%以下であることがより好ましく、 20質量%以下であることが特に 好ましい。 [0132] When the photosensitive resin composition layer contains another polymer, the content of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less based on the total mass of the polymer component, It is more preferably at most% by mass, particularly preferably at most 20% by mass.
[0133] 感光性樹脂組成物層が他の重合体を含有する場合、 重合体成分の含有量は 、 密着性の観点から、 感光性樹脂組成物層の全質量に対し、 50質量%〜 9 9. 9質量%であることが好ましく、 70質量%〜 98質量%であることが より好ましい。 [0133] When the photosensitive resin composition layer contains another polymer, the content of the polymer component is, from the viewpoint of adhesion, 50% by mass to 9% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition layer. It is preferably 9.9% by mass, more preferably 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
[0134] (光酸発生剤) [0134] (Photoacid generator)
感光性樹脂組成物層は、 光酸発生剤を含有することが好ましい。 The photosensitive resin composition layer preferably contains a photoacid generator.
[0135] 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤は、 紫外線、 遠紫外線、 X線、 電子線等の 〇 2020/174767 33 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0135] The photo-acid generator used in the present disclosure includes ultraviolet rays, deep ultraviolet rays, X-rays, electron beams, etc. 〇2020/174767 33 卩(:171?2019/044334
活性光線を照射することにより酸を発生することができる化合物である。 光酸発生剤としては、 波長 3 0 0 n 以上、 好ましくは波長
Figure imgf000035_0001
4 5 0 n〇!の活性光線に感応し、 酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、 その化 学構造は制限されない。 また、 波長 3 0 0 n 以上の活性光線に直接感応し ない光酸発生剤についても、 増感剤と併用することによって波長 3 0 0
Figure imgf000035_0002
以上の活性光線に感応し、 酸を発生する化合物であれば、 増感剤と組み合わ せて好ましく用いることができる。
It is a compound capable of generating an acid when irradiated with an actinic ray. As the photo-acid generator, a wavelength of 300 n or more, preferably a wavelength of
Figure imgf000035_0001
Compounds that generate an acid by reacting to actinic rays of 450 n 〇! are preferable, but the chemical structure thereof is not limited. In addition, a photo-acid generator that is not directly sensitive to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 n or more can be used by combining it with a sensitizer.
Figure imgf000035_0002
Any compound capable of reacting with the above-mentioned actinic rays and generating an acid can be preferably used in combination with the sensitizer.
光酸発生剤としては、 < 3が 4以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が好まし く、 < 3が 3以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤がより好ましく、
Figure imgf000035_0003
が 2 以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が特に好ましい。 < 3の下限値は特に定め ない。
Figure imgf000035_0004
は、 例えば、 一 1 0 . 0以上であることが好ましい。
As the photoacid generator, a photoacid generator that generates an acid of <3 is 4 or less is preferable, and a photoacid generator that generates an acid of <3 is 3 or less is more preferable,
Figure imgf000035_0003
A photo-acid generator that generates an acid of 2 or less is particularly preferable. The lower limit of <3 is not specified.
Figure imgf000035_0004
Is, for example, preferably not less than 10.0.
[0136] 光酸発生剤としては、 例えば、 イオン性光酸発生剤、 及び非イオン性光酸 発生剤が挙げられる。 [0136] Examples of the photoacid generator include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
[0137] イオン性光酸発生剤としては、 例えば、 ジアリールヨードニウム塩化合物 及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩化合物等のオニウム塩化合物、 並びに第四 級アンモニウム塩化合物等が挙げられる。 上記の中でも、 オニウム塩化合物 が好ましく、 ジアリールヨードニウム塩類、 又はトリアリールスルホニウム 塩化合物が特に好ましい。 Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salt compounds and triarylsulfonium salt compounds, and quaternary ammonium salt compounds. Among the above, onium salt compounds are preferable, and diaryl iodonium salts or triaryl sulfonium salt compounds are particularly preferable.
イオン性光酸発生剤としては、 特開 2 0 1 4— 8 5 6 4 3号公報の段落 0 1 1 4〜段落 0 1 3 3に記載のイオン性光酸発生剤も好ましく用いることが できる。 As the ionic photoacid generator, the ionic photoacid generator described in paragraphs 0 1 1 4 to 0 1 3 3 of JP-A No. 2 041-85 6 4 3 can also be preferably used. ..
[0138] 非イオン性光酸発生剤としては、 例えば、 トリクロロメチルー 3 -トリア ジン化合物、 ジアゾメタン化合物、 イミ ドスルホネート化合物、 及びオキシ ムスルホネート化合物が挙げられる。 上記の中でも、 感度、 解像度、 及び密 着性の観点から、 オキシムスルホネート化合物が好ましい。 トリクロロメチ ルー 3 _トリアジン化合物、 ジアゾメタン化合物、 及びイミ ドスルホネート 化合物の具体例としては、 特開 2 0 1 1 - 2 2 1 4 9 4号公報の段落 0 0 8 3〜段落 0 0 8 8に記載の化合物が例示できる。 〇 2020/174767 34 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0138] Examples of the nonionic photoacid generator include trichloromethyl-3-triazine compounds, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. Among the above, the oxime sulfonate compound is preferable from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion. Specific examples of trichloromethyl 3_ triazine compounds, diazomethane compounds, and imidsulfonate compounds are described in JP-A Nos. 2 0 1 1 -2 2 1 4 9 4 paragraphs 0 0 8 3 to 0 8 8 8. The compounds described can be exemplified. 〇 2020/174767 34 卩 (:171?2019/044334
[0139] オキシムスルホネート化合物としては、 国際公開第 2 0 1 8 / 1 7 9 6 4 〇号の段落〇〇 8 4〜段落 0 0 8 8に記載されたものを好適に用いることが できる。 [0139] As the oxime sulfonate compound, those described in paragraphs 〇 804 to 088 of International Publication No. 2018/179648 can be preferably used.
[0140] 光酸発生剤は、 感度及び解像度の観点から、 オニゥム塩化合物、 及びオキ シムスルホネート化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも 1種の化合物を 含むことが好ましく、 オキシムスルホネート化合物を含むことがより好まし い。 [0140] From the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, the photo-acid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound and an oxime sulfonate compound, and preferably contains an oxime sulfonate compound. More preferred.
また、 好ましい光酸発生剤として、 例えば、 以下の構造の光酸発生剤が挙 げられる。 In addition, examples of preferable photoacid generators include photoacid generators having the following structures.
[0141 ] [化 3] [0141] [Chemical 3]
Figure imgf000036_0001
Figure imgf000036_0001
[0142] 感光性樹脂組成物層は、 1種単独の光酸発生剤を含有していてもよく、 2 種以上の光酸発生剤を含有していてもよい。 [0142] The photosensitive resin composition layer may contain one type of photoacid generator alone, or may contain two or more types of photoacid generator.
[0143] 感光性樹脂組成物層における光酸発生剤の含有量は、 感度及び解像度の観 点から、 感光性樹脂組成物層の全質量に対して、 〇. 1質量%〜 1 0質量% であることが好ましく、 〇. 5質量%〜 5質量%であることがより好ましい [0143] From the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, the content of the photo-acid generator in the photosensitive resin composition layer is from 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition layer. Is preferable, and it is more preferable that the amount is from 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass.
[0144] (他の添加剤) [0144] (Other additives)
感光性樹脂組成物層は、 必要に応じて、 他の添加剤を含むことができる。 The photosensitive resin composition layer may contain other additives, if necessary.
[0145] 他の添加剤としては、 公知の添加剤を用いることができ、 例えば、 可塑剤 、 増感剤、 ヘテロ環状化合物、 アルコキシシラン化合物、 塩基性化合物、 防 鲭剤、 及び界面活性剤が挙げられる。 [0145] As other additives, known additives may be used, and examples thereof include a plasticizer, a sensitizer, a heterocyclic compound, an alkoxysilane compound, a basic compound, an antisolent agent, and a surfactant. Can be mentioned.
[0146] 可塑剤、 増感剤、 ヘテロ環状化合物及びアルコキシシラン化合物としては 、 例えば、 国際公開第 2 0 1 8 / 1 7 9 6 4 0号の段落 0 0 9 7〜段落 0 1 1 9に記載された可塑剤、 増感剤、 ヘテロ環状化合物及びアルコキシシラン 化合物が挙げられる。 〇 2020/174767 35 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0146] Examples of the plasticizer, the sensitizer, the heterocyclic compound and the alkoxysilane compound are described in, for example, paragraphs 0 0 9 7 to 0 1 1 9 of International Publication No. 2018/17 9640. The mentioned plasticizers, sensitizers, heterocyclic compounds and alkoxysilane compounds are mentioned. 〇 2020/174767 35 卩 (:171?2019/044334
[0147] また、 感光性樹脂組成物層は、 溶剤を含有していてもよい。 溶剤を含む感 光性樹脂組成物により感光性樹脂組成物層を形成した場合、 感光性樹脂組成 物層中に溶剤が残留することもある。 [0147] Further, the photosensitive resin composition layer may contain a solvent. When the photosensitive resin composition layer is formed from the photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent, the solvent may remain in the photosensitive resin composition layer.
[0148] 感光性樹脂組成物層における溶剤の含有量は、 感光性樹脂組成物層の全質 量に対し、 5質量%以下であることが好ましく、 2質量%以下であることが より好ましく、 1質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 [0148] The content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin composition layer is preferably 5% by mass or less, and more preferably 2% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition layer. It is more preferably 1% by mass or less.
[0149] 一塩基性化合物一 [0149] One basic compound
感光性樹脂組成物層は、 塩基性化合物を含有することが好ましい。 The photosensitive resin composition layer preferably contains a basic compound.
[0150] 塩基性化合物としては、 化学増幅レジストで用いられる塩基性化合物の中 から任意に選択して使用することができる。 塩基性化合物としては、 例えば 、 脂肪族アミン、 芳香族アミン、 複素環式アミン、 第四級アンモニウムヒド ロキシド、 及びカルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩が挙げられる。 塩基性化 合物の具体例としては、 特開 2 0 1 1 - 2 2 1 4 9 4号公報の段落 0 2 0 4 〜段落 0 2 0 7に記載の化合物が挙げられ、 これらの内容は本明細書に組み 込まれる。 [0150] As the basic compound, any of the basic compounds used in the chemically amplified resist can be selected and used. Examples of the basic compound include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids. Specific examples of the basic compound include compounds described in paragraphs 0 2 0 4 to 0 2 07 of JP 2 0 1 1 -2 2 1 4 9 4 JP, the contents of which are Incorporated herein.
[0151 ] また、 塩基性化合物としては、 1\1—シクロヘキシルー 1\1’ 一 [ 2— (4— モルホリニル) エチル] チオ尿素 (〇 IV!丁 II) を好適に用いることができる 。 また、 〇1\/1丁11の市販品としては、 東洋化成工業株式会社製の
Figure imgf000037_0001
挙げられる。
[0151] Also, as the basic compound, 1\1-cyclohexyl-1\1'-[2-(4-morpholinyl)ethyl]thiourea (O IV! Ding II) can be preferably used. In addition, as a commercially available product of 1/1 / 11, it is manufactured by Toyo Kasei
Figure imgf000037_0001
Can be mentioned.
[0152] 塩基性化合物としては、 導電パターンの形成に適用した場合における導電 配線の直線性の観点から、 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物が好ましい。 [0152] As the basic compound, a benzotriazole compound is preferable from the viewpoint of linearity of conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、 ベンゾトリアゾール骨格を有する化 合物であれば制限されず、 公知のベンゾトリアゾール化合物を用いることが できる。 The benzotriazole compound is not limited as long as it is a compound having a benzotriazole skeleton, and a known benzotriazole compound can be used.
ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、 例えば、 1 , 2 , 3 -べンゾトリア ゾール、 1 — [ 1\1 , 1\1 _ビス (2—エチルヘキシル) アミノメチル] ベンゾ トリアゾール、 5—カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、 1 — (ヒドロキシメチ ル) _ 1 ! ! _ベンゾトリアゾール、 1 —アセチルー 1 ! ! _ベンゾトリアゾー 〇 2020/174767 36 卩(:171?2019/044334 ル、 1 —アミノべンゾトリアゾール、 9 _ ( 1 1~1 _ベンゾトリアゾールー 1 —イルメチル) 一 9 1~1—カルバゾール、 1 —クロロー 1 1~1—ベンゾトリアゾ —ル、 1 — (2—ピリジニル) ベンゾトリアゾール、 1 —ヒドロキシベンゾ トリアゾール、 1 —メチルべンゾトリアゾール、 1 —エチルべンゾトリアゾ —ル、 1 — (1’ ーヒドロキシエチル) ベンゾトリアゾール、 1 — (2’ - ヒドロキシエチル) ベンゾトリアゾール、 1 —プロピルべンゾトリアゾール 、 1 — (1’ ーヒドロキシプロピル) ベンゾトリアゾール、 1 — (2’ ーヒ ドロキシプロピル) ベンゾトリアゾール、 1 _ (3’ ーヒドロキシプロピル ) ベンゾトリアゾール、 4—ヒドロキシ _ 1 1~1 _ベンゾトリアゾール、 5 - メチルー 1 1~1 _ベンゾトリアゾール、 メチルべンゾトリアゾールー 5—カル ボキシレート、 エチルべンゾトリアゾールー 5—カルボキシレート、 1 _ブ チルーベンゾトリアゾールー 5—カルボキシレート、 シクロペンチルエチル —ベンゾトリアゾールー 5—カルボキシレート、 1 1~1 _ベンゾトリアゾール — 1 —アセトニトリル、 1 1~1—ベンゾトリアゾールー 1 —カルボキシアルデ ヒド、 2—メチルー 2 1~1 _ベンゾトリアゾール、 2—エチルー 2 1~1 _ベンゾ トリアゾールなどが挙げられる。 Examples of the benzotriazole compound include 1, 2, 3, 3-benzotriazole, 1 — [1\1, 1\1 _ bis(2-ethylhexyl)aminomethyl]benzotriazole, 5-carboxybenzotriazole, 1 — ( Hydroxymethyl) _ 1 !! _ Benzotriazole, 1 — Acetyl 1 !! _ Benzotriazo 〇 2020/174767 36 卩 (:171?2019/044334, 1-aminobenzotriazole, 9 _ (1 1 to 1 _benzotriazol 1 -ylmethyl) 1 9 1 to 1-carbazole, 1 -chloro 1 1 to 1-benzotriazol, 1-(2-pyridinyl) benzotriazole, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, 1-methylbenzotriazole, 1-ethylbenzotriazol, 1-(1'-hydroxyethyl)benzo Triazole, 1 — (2′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1 — (1′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1 — (2′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1 _ (3'-Hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 4-hydroxy _ 1 1 to 1 _ benzotriazole, 5-methyl- 1 1 to 1 _ benzotriazole, methylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate, ethylbenzotriazole 5-Carboxylate, 1 _ Butyl-benzotriazole-5-carboxylate, Cyclopentylethyl — Benzotriazole-5-carboxylate, 1 1 ~ 1 _ Benzotriazole — 1 — Acetonitrile, 1 1 ~ 1 — Benzotriazole 1 — Examples thereof include carboxy aldehyde, 2-methyl-2 1 to 1 _benzotriazole, and 2-ethyl 2 1 to 1 _benzotriazole.
[0153] 感光性樹脂組成物層は、 1種単独の塩基性化合物を含有していてもよく、 [0153] The photosensitive resin composition layer may contain one kind of basic compound,
2種以上の塩基性化合物を含有していてもよい。 It may contain two or more basic compounds.
[0154] 塩基性化合物の含有量は、 感光性樹脂組成物層の全質量に対して、 0 . 0 [0154] The content of the basic compound is 0.0 with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition layer.
0 1質量%〜 5質量%であることが好ましく、 〇. 0 0 5質量%〜 3質量% であることがより好ましい。 It is preferably from 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass, more preferably from 0.05% by mass to 3% by mass.
[0155] _界面活性剤一 [0155] _Surfactant I
感光性樹脂組成物層は、 厚さ均一性の観点から界面活性剤を含有すること が好ましい。 The photosensitive resin composition layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
[0156] 界面活性剤としては、 例えば、 アニオン性界面活性剤、 カチオン性界面活 性剤、 ノニオン性 (非イオン性) 界面活性剤、 及び両性界面活性剤が挙げら れる。 好ましい界面活性剤は、 ノニオン性界面活性剤である。 [0156] Examples of the surfactant include anionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, nonionic (nonionic) surfactants, and amphoteric surfactants. A preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
ノニオン性界面活性剤の例としては、 例えば、 ポリオキシエチレン高級ア 〇 2020/174767 37 卩(:171?2019/044334 Examples of nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher surfactants. 〇 2020/174767 37 卩 (:171?2019/044334
ルキルェーテル系界面活性剤、 ポリオキシェチレン高級アルキルフェニルェ —テル系界面活性剤、 ポリオキシェチレングリコールの高級脂肪酸ジェステ ル系界面活性剤、 シリコーン系界面活性剤、 及びフッ素系界面活性剤が挙げ られる。 Examples include rutile ether-based surfactants, polyoxyethylene higher alkylphenyl ether-based surfactants, polyoxyethylene glycol higher fatty acid ester-based surfactants, silicone-based surfactants, and fluorine-based surfactants. To be
[0157] 界面活性剤としては、 例えば、 国際公開第 2 0 1 8 / 1 7 9 6 4 0号の段 落 0 1 2 0〜段落 0 1 2 5に記載の界面活性剤を用いることができる。 [0157] As the surfactant, for example, the surfactants described in paragraphs 0120 to paragraph 0125 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be used. ..
[0158] また、 界面活性剤の市販品としては、 例えば、 メガファック (登録商標) ー5 5 2又は ー5 5 4 (以上、 口 丨 〇株式会社製) を用いることができ る。 [0158] As a commercially available product of the surfactant, for example, Megafac (registered trademark) -552 or -554 (above, manufactured by Kuchiki O Co., Ltd.) can be used.
[0159] その他、 特許第 4 5 0 2 7 8 4号公報の段落 0 0 1 7、 特開 2 0 0 9 _ 2 [0159] In addition, paragraph 0 0 1 7 of Japanese Patent No. 45 0 2 7 8 4 and JP 2 0 0 9 _ 2
3 7 3 6 2号公報の段落 0 0 6 0〜段落 0 0 7 1 に記載の界面活性剤も用い ることができる。 The surfactants described in paragraphs 0 0 6 0 to 0 0 7 1 of Japanese Patent Publication No. 37362 can also be used.
[0160] 感光性樹脂組成物層は、 1種単独の界面活性剤を含有していてもよく、 2 種以上の界面活性剤を含有していてもよい。 [0160] The photosensitive resin composition layer may contain one kind of surfactant alone, or may contain two or more kinds of surfactant.
[0161 ] 界面活性剤の含有量は、 感光性樹脂組成物層の全質量に対して、 0 . 0 0 [0161] The content of the surfactant is 0.00 relative to the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition layer.
1質量%〜 1 0質量%であることが好ましく、 0 . 0 1質量%〜 3質量%で あることがより好ましい。 It is preferably 1% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass.
[0162] また、 本開示における感光性樹脂組成物層は、 上記以外の添加剤として、 金属酸化物粒子、 酸化防止剤、 分散剤、 酸増殖剤、 現像促進剤、 導電性繊維 、 着色剤、 熱ラジカル重合開始剤、 熱酸発生剤、 紫外線吸収剤、 増粘剤、 架 橋剤、 及び、 有機又は無機の沈殿防止剤等の公知の添加剤を含有することが できる。 [0162] In addition, the photosensitive resin composition layer in the present disclosure includes, as additives other than the above, metal oxide particles, antioxidants, dispersants, acid proliferating agents, development accelerators, conductive fibers, colorants, It may contain known additives such as a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, a thickener, a crosslinking agent, and an organic or inorganic precipitation inhibitor.
これらの成分の好ましい態様については特開 2 0 1 4— 8 5 6 4 3号公報 の段落〇 1 6 5〜段落 0 1 8 4にそれぞれ記載があり、 この公報の内容は本 明細書に組み込まれる。 Preferable embodiments of these components are described in paragraphs 〇165 to 81584 of JP-A No. 2 015 4-8 5 6 4 3 respectively, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present specification. Be done.
[0163] (感光性樹脂組成物層の平均厚さ) [0163] (Average Thickness of Photosensitive Resin Composition Layer)
感光性樹脂組成物層の平均厚さは、 〇. 5 〜 2 0 であることが好 ましい。 感光性樹脂組成物層の厚みが 2 0 以下であるとパターンの解像 〇 2020/174767 38 卩(:171?2019/044334 The average thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer is preferably 0.5 to 20. When the thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer is 20 or less, the pattern is resolved. 〇 2020/174767 38 卩 (:171?2019/044334
度がより優れ、 〇. 5 以上であるとパターン直線性の観点から好ましい また、 感光性樹脂組成物層の平均厚さは、 〇. 8 〜 1 5 であるこ とがより好ましく、 1 . 0 〜 1 0 〇!であることが特に好ましい。 感光性樹脂組成物層の平均厚さは、 上記ポリイミ ド基板の平均厚さの測定 方法に準ずる方法で測定する。 The degree is more excellent, and is preferably 0.5 or more from the viewpoint of pattern linearity.The average thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer is more preferably 0.8 to 15 and 1.0 to Particularly preferred is 100! The average thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer is measured by a method according to the method for measuring the average thickness of the above polyimide substrate.
[0164] (感光性樹脂組成物層の形成方法) (Method for forming photosensitive resin composition layer)
感光性樹脂組成物層は、 感光性樹脂組成物層の形成に用いる成分と、 溶剤 とを含有する感光性樹脂組成物を用いることにより形成することができる。 各成分を、 それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、 得られた溶液を所 定の割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。 以上の如く して調製し た組成物は、 例えば、 孔径〇. 2 〜 3〇 のフィルター等を用いてろ 過を行ってもよい。 The photosensitive resin composition layer can be formed by using a photosensitive resin composition containing a component used for forming the photosensitive resin composition layer and a solvent. It is also possible to prepare a composition by dissolving each component in a solvent in advance and then mixing the obtained solutions at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above may be filtered using, for example, a filter having a pore size of 0.2 to 30.
本開示においては、 例えば、 感光性樹脂組成物を仮支持体又は保護フィル ム上に塗布し、 乾燥させることで、 本開示における感光性樹脂組成物層を形 成することができる。 In the present disclosure, for example, the photosensitive resin composition layer according to the present disclosure can be formed by applying the photosensitive resin composition onto a temporary support or a protective film and drying.
塗布方法としては、 制限されず、 スリッ ト塗布、 スピン塗布、 力ーテン塗 布、 及びインクジェッ ト塗布が挙げられる。 The coating method is not limited, and includes slit coating, spin coating, force-ten coating, and ink jet coating.
また、 仮支持体又は保護フィルム上に後述の中間層又はその他の層を形成 した上に、 感光性樹脂組成物層を形成することもできる。 In addition, the photosensitive resin composition layer may be formed on the intermediate layer or other layers described below formed on the temporary support or the protective film.
[0165] 溶剤としては、 公知の溶媒を使用でき、 例えば、 国際公開第 2 0 1 8 / 1 [0165] As the solvent, a known solvent can be used, and, for example, International Publication No. 20 18/1
7 9 6 4 0号の段落 0 0 9 2〜段落 0 0 9 4に記載された溶剤を用いること ができる。 It is possible to use the solvents described in paragraphs 0 0 9 2 to 0 9 9 4 of 796 0 4.
[0166] また、 特開 2 0 1 8— 1 7 7 8 8 9公報の段落 0 0 1 4に記載された 2 0 °〇における蒸気圧が 1
Figure imgf000040_0001
下の溶剤を好ましく用いるこ とができる。
[0166] Further, the vapor pressure at 20 ° 〇 described in paragraph 0 0 1 4 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 20 1 8 — 1 7 7 8 8 9 is 1
Figure imgf000040_0001
The following solvents can be preferably used.
本開示に用いることができる溶剤は、 1種単独で用いてもよく、 2種を併 用してもよい。 〇 2020/174767 39 卩(:171?2019/044334 As the solvent that can be used in the present disclosure, one type may be used alone, or two types may be used in combination. 〇 2020/174767 39 卩 (:171?2019/044334
[0167] 感光性樹脂組成物における溶剤の含有量は、 感光性樹脂組成物中の全固形 分 1 0 0質量部に対し、 5 0質量部〜 1 , 9 0 0質量部であることが好まし く、 1 〇〇質量部〜 9 0 0質量部であることがより好ましい。 [0167] The content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. More preferably, it is 100 to 900 parts by mass.
[0168] 〔中間層〕 [0168] [Intermediate layer]
本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、 上記仮支持体と上記感光性樹脂組成物層 との間に、 中間層を有することが好ましい。 The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably has an intermediate layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive resin composition layer.
[0169] (重合体) [0169] (Polymer)
中間層は、 重合体を含有することが好ましい。 重合体としては、 水溶性樹 月旨、 又はアルカリ可溶性樹脂が好ましい。 また、 中間層に含有される重合体 が水溶性樹脂である場合、 上記水溶性樹脂は、 さらにアルカリ可溶性を有し ていてもよい。 中間層に含有される重合体がアルカリ可溶性樹脂である場合 、 上記アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、 さらに水溶性を有していてもよい。 The intermediate layer preferably contains a polymer. As the polymer, water-soluble resin or alkali-soluble resin is preferable. When the polymer contained in the intermediate layer is a water-soluble resin, the water-soluble resin may further have alkali solubility. When the polymer contained in the intermediate layer is an alkali-soluble resin, the alkali-soluble resin may further have water solubility.
[0170] 本開示において、 「水溶性」 とは、 2 2 °〇において 1~1 7 . 0の水 1 0 0 [0170] In the present disclosure, "water-soluble" means 1 to 17.0 of water at 22°C.
9への溶解度が〇. 1 9以上であることを意味し、 「アルカリ可溶性」 とは 、 2 2 °〇において炭酸ナトリウムの 1質量%水溶液 1 0 0 9への溶解度が 0 . 1 9以上であることを意味する。 It means that the solubility in 9 is 0. 19 or more, and "alkali-soluble" means that the solubility in a 1% by mass aqueous solution of sodium carbonate at 22 ° is 0.19 or more. Means there is.
[0171 ] また、 重合体は、 2 2 °〇における 1~1 7 . 0の水 1 0 0 9への溶解度が、 [0171] In addition, the polymer has a solubility of 1 to 17.0 in water 109 at 22°
1 9以上であることが好ましく、 5 9以上であることがより好ましい。 It is preferably 19 or more, more preferably 59 or more.
[0172] 水溶性樹脂としては、 例えば、 セルロース樹脂、 ポリビニルアルコール樹 月旨、 ポリビニルピロリ ドン樹脂、 アクリルアミ ド樹脂、 (メタ) アクリレー 卜樹脂、 ポリエチレンオキサイ ド樹脂、 ゼラチン、 ビニルエーテル樹脂、 ポ リアミ ド樹脂、 及びこれらの共重合体が挙げられる。 上記の中でも、 水溶性 樹脂は、 セルロース樹脂であることが好ましく、 ヒドロキシプロピルセルロ —ス、 及びヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースよりなる群から選ばれた少 なくとも 1種の樹脂であることがより好ましい。 [0172] As the water-soluble resin, for example, cellulose resin, polyvinyl alcohol resin, polyvinylpyrrolidone resin, acrylic amide resin, (meth) acrylate resin, polyethylene oxide resin, gelatin, vinyl ether resin, polyamid Resin, and copolymers thereof. Among the above, the water-soluble resin is preferably a cellulose resin, and more preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropyl cellulose and hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose.
[0173] アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、 アルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が好ましく、 塩を形成してもよい酸基を有するアクリル樹脂がより好ましい。 [0173] As the alkali-soluble resin, an alkali-soluble acrylic resin is preferable, and an acrylic resin having an acid group which may form a salt is more preferable.
[0174] 中間層は、 1種単独の重合体を含有していてもよく、 2種以上の重合体を 〇 2020/174767 40 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0174] The intermediate layer may contain one kind of polymer, or two or more kinds of polymers. 〇 2020/174767 40 卩 (:171?2019/044334
含有していてもよい。 It may be contained.
[0175] 重合体の含有量は、 密着性の観点から、 中間層の全質量に対して、 2 0質 量%〜 1 0 0質量%であることが好ましく、 5 0質量%〜 1 0 0質量%であ ることがより好ましい。 [0175] From the viewpoint of adhesion, the content of the polymer is preferably 20% by mass to 100% by mass, and 50% by mass to 100% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer. More preferably, it is mass %.
[0176] ( 1~1感受性色素) [0176] (1 to 1 sensitive dye)
中間層は、 露光パターンの確認容易性の観点から、 発色時における波長範
Figure imgf000042_0001
以上であり、 1~1に より極大吸収波長が変化する 1~1感受性色素を含むことが好ましい。
The intermediate layer has a wavelength range during color development from the viewpoint of easy confirmation of the exposure pattern.
Figure imgf000042_0001
Or more, preferably contains 1 to 1 sensitive dye is more maximum absorption wavelength in the 1 to 1 changes.
ここで、 「極大吸収波長が変化する」 とは、 発色状態にある色素が消色す る態様、 消色状態にある色素が発色する態様、 及び発色状態にある色素が他 の色相の発色状態に変化する態様のいずれの態様を指すものであってもよい Here, "the maximum absorption wavelength changes" means that a dye in a colored state is decolored, a dye in a decolored state is colored, and a dye in a colored state is in a coloring state of another hue. To any of the aspects that change to
[0177] !~1感受性色素は、 視認性の観点から、 光酸発生剤から発生する酸により 消色する潜在性色素であることがより好ましい。 [0177]! ~ 1-sensitive dye, in terms of visibility, and more preferably by an acid generated from the photoacid generator is a potential dye is decolored.
[0178] 1~1感受性色素であることの確認は、 以下の方法により行うことができる 色素〇. 1 9を、 エタノール及び水の混合溶液 (エタノール/水 = 1 / 2 [質量比] ) 1 0 0 1_に溶かし、 〇.
Figure imgf000042_0002
の塩酸水溶液 を加えて 1~1 = 1 に調整する。 〇. 0 1 〇1〇 1 / 1_ (〇. 0 1 1\1) の水酸化 ナトリウム水溶液で滴定し、 発色変化と発色変化が現れた際の 1~1とを確認 する。 なお、 1~1は、 1~1メーター (型番:
Figure imgf000042_0003
東亜ディーケーケ —株式会社製) を用いて 2 5 °〇で測定される値である。
[0178] The dye can be confirmed to be a 1 to 1 sensitive dye by the following method. Dye 〇.19 is mixed with ethanol and water (ethanol/water = 1/2 [mass ratio]) 1 Dissolve in 0 0 1_, 〇.
Figure imgf000042_0002
Add the hydrochloric acid aqueous solution of to adjust to 1 to 1 = 1. Titrate with 0.001 ○ 1 ○ 1 / 1_ (○ 0.01 1\1) sodium hydroxide solution, and check the color change and 1 to 1 when the color change appears. In addition, 1 ~ 1 is 1 ~ 1 meter (model number:
Figure imgf000042_0003
It is a value measured at 25 ° 〇 using Toa D-Keke Co., Ltd.).
[0179] 本開示における極大吸収波長の測定方法は、 大気の雰囲気下で、 2 5 °〇に て分光光度計: II V 3 1 0 0 (株式会社島津製作所製) を用いて、 4 0 0 n 〇1〜7 8 0 〇!の範囲で透過スぺクトルを測定し、 光の強度が極小となる波 長 (極大吸収波長) を測定するものとする。 [0179] The method for measuring the maximum absorption wavelength in the present disclosure is to measure the maximum absorption wavelength in an atmosphere of atmospheric air using a spectrophotometer: II V3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 250 °. The transmission spectrum shall be measured in the range of n 〇 to 780!, and the wavelength at which the light intensity becomes minimum (maximum absorption wavelength) shall be measured.
[0180] 露光により消色する色素としては、 例えば、 ロイコ化合物、 ジフエニルメ タン系色素、 オキザジン系色素、 キサンテン系色素、 イミノナフトキノン系 〇 2020/174767 41 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0180] Examples of dyes that are decolorized by exposure include leuco compounds, diphenylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes. 〇 2020/174767 41 卩 (:171?2019/044334
色素、 アゾメチン系色素、 及びアントラキノン系色素が挙げられる。 Dyes, azomethine dyes, and anthraquinone dyes.
[0181 ] 上記の中でも、 色素としては、 視認性の観点から、 ロイコ化合物が好まし い。 [0181] Among the above, a leuco compound is preferable as the dye from the viewpoint of visibility.
ロイコ化合物としては、 例えば、 トリアリールメタン系 (例えばトリフエ ニルメタン系) 、 スピロピラン系、 フルオラン系、 ジフエニルメタン系、 口 —ダミンラクタム系、 インドリルフタリ ド系、 ロイコオーラミン系等のロイ コ化合物が挙げられる。 中でも、 トリアリールメタン骨格を有するロイコ化 合物 (すなわち、 トリアリールメタン系色素) が好ましく、 トリフエニルメ タン系色素がより好ましい。 Examples of leuco compounds include triarylmethane-based (eg, triphenylmethane-based), spiropyran-based, fluoran-based, diphenylmethane-based, mouth-daminelactam-based, indolylphthalide-based, leucoauramine-based leuco compounds. .. Of these, leuco compounds having a triarylmethane skeleton (that is, triarylmethane dyes) are preferable, and triphenylmethane dyes are more preferable.
また、 ロイコ化合物としては、 視認性の観点から、 ラクトン環、 スルチン 環、 又はスルトン環を有し、 ラクトン環、 スルチン環、 若しくはスルトン環 が開環又は閉環するロイコ化合物が好ましく、 スルトン環を有し、 スルトン 環が閉環して消色するロイコ化合物であることがより好ましい。 From the viewpoint of visibility, the leuco compound is preferably a leuco compound having a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring, and having a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring opened or closed, and a sultone ring. However, it is more preferable that the sultone ring is a leuco compound that is closed and decolorized.
[0182] 色素は、 色素の析出による欠陥を防止する目的で、 水溶性の化合物である ことが好ましい。 [0182] The dye is preferably a water-soluble compound for the purpose of preventing defects due to precipitation of the dye.
また、 色素は、 2 2 °〇における 1~1 7 . 0の水 1 0 0 9への溶解度が、 1 9以上であることが好ましく、 5 9以上であることがより好ましい。 Further, the dye preferably has a solubility of 1 to 17.0 in water 109 at 22° of 19 or more, and more preferably 59 or more.
[0183] 中間層は、 1種単独の色素を含有していてもよく、 2種以上の色素を含有 していてもよい。 [0183] The intermediate layer may contain one type of dye alone, or may contain two or more types of dye.
[0184] 色素の含有量は、 視認性の観点から、 中間層の全質量に対し、 0 . 0 1質 量%〜 1 0質量%であることが好ましく、 〇. 5質量%〜 5質量%であるこ とがより好ましく、 1 . 0質量%〜 3 . 0質量%であることが特に好ましい [0184] From the viewpoint of visibility, the content of the dye is preferably 0.01 mass% to 10 mass%, and 0.5 mass% to 5 mass% with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer. Is more preferable, and 1.0% by mass to 3.0% by mass is particularly preferable.
[0185] (界面活性剤) [0185] (Surfactant)
中間層は、 厚さ均一性の観点から、 界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい 。 界面活性剤としては、 フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤、 ケイ素原子を有す る界面活性剤、 及びフッ素原子とケイ素原子とを有しない界面活性剤のいず れも使用することができる。 上記の中でも、 界面活性剤は、 感光性樹脂組成 〇 2020/174767 42 卩(:171?2019/044334 The intermediate layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity. As the surfactant, any of a surfactant having a fluorine atom, a surfactant having a silicon atom, and a surfactant having no fluorine atom and a silicon atom can be used. Among the above, the surfactant is a photosensitive resin composition. 〇2020/174767 42 卩(:171?2019/044334
物層及び中間層におけるスジの発生抑制、 及び密着性の観点から、 フッ素原 子を有する界面活性剤であることが好ましく、 パーフルオロアルキル基とポ リアルキレンオキシ基とを有する界面活性剤であることがより好ましい。 From the viewpoints of suppressing the generation of streaks in the material layer and the intermediate layer, and from the viewpoint of adhesion, a surfactant having a fluorine atom is preferable, and a surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group and a polyalkyleneoxy group is preferable. Is more preferable.
[0186] また、 界面活性剤としては、 アニオン性界面活性剤、 カチオン性界面活性 剤、 ノニオン性 (非イオン性界面活性剤) 、 及び両性界面活性剤のいずれで も使用することができるが、 好ましい界面活性剤はノニオン性界面活性剤で ある。 [0186] As the surfactant, any of anionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, nonionic (nonionic surfactants), and amphoteric surfactants can be used. A preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
[0187] 界面活性剤は、 界面活性剤の析出抑制の観点から、 2 5 °〇の水 1 0 0 9に 対する溶解度が 1 9以上である界面活性剤が好ましい。 [0187] From the viewpoint of suppressing the precipitation of the surfactant, the surfactant is preferably a surfactant having a solubility in water at 25 ° C of 109 of 19 or more.
[0188] 中間層は、 1種単独の界面活性剤を含有していてもよく、 2種以上の界面 活性剤を含有していてもよい。 [0188] The intermediate layer may contain one kind of surfactant alone, or may contain two or more kinds of surfactant.
[0189] 中間層における界面活性剤の含有量は、 感光性樹脂組成物層及び中間層に おけるスジの発生抑制、 及び密着性の観点から、 中間層の全質量に対して、 〇. 0 5質量%〜 2 . 0質量%であることが好ましく、 〇. 1質量%〜 ·! . [0189] The content of the surfactant in the intermediate layer is from the viewpoint of suppressing streak generation in the photosensitive resin composition layer and the intermediate layer, and the adhesiveness, based on the total mass of the intermediate layer: 0.05 % To 2.0% by mass is preferable, and 0.1% by mass to...! .
〇質量%であることがより好ましく、 〇. 2質量%〜〇. 5質量%であるこ とが特に好ましい。 It is more preferable that the content is ◯ mass%, and it is particularly preferable that the content is 0.2 mass% to 0.5 mass%.
[0190] (無機フイラー) [0190] (Inorganic filler)
中間層は、 無機フイラーを含有することができる。 無機フイラーとしては 、 例えば、 シリカ粒子、 酸化アルミニウム粒子、 及び酸化ジルコニウム粒子 が挙げられ、 シリカ粒子がより好ましい。 透明性の観点から粒径の小さい粒 子が好ましく、 平均粒径が 1 0 0 n 以下の無機フイラーがより好ましい。 例えば市販品であればスノーテックス (登録商標) が好適に用いられる。 The intermediate layer can contain an inorganic filler. Examples of the inorganic filler include silica particles, aluminum oxide particles, and zirconium oxide particles, and silica particles are more preferable. From the viewpoint of transparency, particles having a small particle size are preferable, and an inorganic filler having an average particle size of 100 n or less is more preferable. For example, if it is a commercially available product, Snowtex (registered trademark) is preferably used.
[0191 ] 中間層における上記粒子の体積分率 (中間層における粒子が占める体積割 合) は、 中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、 中間層の全体積に対し、 5 %〜 9 0 %であることが好ましく、 1 0 %〜 8 0 %であることがより好まし く、 2 0 %〜 6 0 %であることが特に好ましい。 [0191] The volume fraction of the particles in the intermediate layer (volume ratio of particles in the intermediate layer) is 5% to 9% with respect to the total volume of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. It is preferably 0%, more preferably 10% to 80%, particularly preferably 20% to 60%.
[0192] ( !~1調整剤) [0192] (! ~ 1 modifier)
中間層は、 ! !調整剤を含有することができる。 中間層が ! !調整剤を含 〇 2020/174767 43 卩(:171?2019/044334 The intermediate layer can contain a !-conditioning agent. The middle layer contains !! 〇 2020/174767 43 卩 (:171?2019/044334
有することで、 中間層中の色素の発色状態又は消色状態をより安定的に維持 することができ、 感光性樹脂組成物層と中間層との密着性がより向上する。 By having it, the coloring state or the decoloring state of the dye in the intermediate layer can be maintained more stably, and the adhesiveness between the photosensitive resin composition layer and the intermediate layer is further improved.
[0193] 1~1調整剤としては、 例えば、 水酸化ナトリウム、 水酸化カリウム、 水酸 化リチウム、 有機アミン、 及び有機アンモニウム塩が挙げられる。 1~1調整 剤は、 水溶性の観点から、 水酸化ナトリウムであることが好ましい。 1~1調 整剤は、 感光性樹脂組成物層と中間層との密着性の観点は、 有機アンモニウ ム塩であることが好ましい。 The [0193] 1 to 1 modifier, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, hydroxide lithium, organic amines, and organic ammonium salts. 1-1 modifier, from the viewpoint of water-soluble, is preferably sodium hydroxide. From the viewpoint of the adhesion between the photosensitive resin composition layer and the intermediate layer, the 1 to 1 adjusting agent is preferably an organic ammonium salt.
[0194] (中間層の平均厚さ) [0194] (Average thickness of intermediate layer)
中間層の平均厚さは、 感光性樹脂組成物層と中間層との密着性、 及びバタ —ン形成性の観点から、 〇. 3 111 ~ 1 〇 が好ましく、 0 . 3 〇1 ~ 5 がより好ましく、 〇. 3 〇!〜 2 〇!が特に好ましい。 The average thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0. 3 111 to 10 from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the photosensitive resin composition layer and the intermediate layer, and the pattern forming property, and 0. 3 0 1 to 5 is preferable. More preferably, 0.30! to 20! is particularly preferable.
また、 中間層の平均厚さは、 感光性樹脂組成物層の平均厚さよりも薄いこ とが好ましい。 Further, the average thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably thinner than the average thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer.
中間層の平均厚さは、 上記ポリイミ ド基板の平均厚さの測定方法に準ずる 方法で測定する。 The average thickness of the intermediate layer is measured according to the method for measuring the average thickness of the above-mentioned polyimide substrate.
[0195] 中間層は、 2層以上の層を有することができる。 [0195] The intermediate layer can have two or more layers.
中間層が 2層以上の層を有する場合、 各層の平均厚さは上記範囲内であれ ば制限されないが、 中間層における 2層以上の層のうち、 感光性樹脂組成物 層に最も近い層の平均厚さは、 中間層と感光性樹脂組成物層との密着性、 及 びバターン形成性の観点から、 〇. 3 〜 1 〇 が好ましく、 0 . 3
Figure imgf000045_0001
がより好ましく、 〇. 3 〇!〜 2 〇!が特に好ましい。
When the intermediate layer has two or more layers, the average thickness of each layer is not limited as long as it is within the above range, but of the two or more layers in the intermediate layer, the layer closest to the photosensitive resin composition layer is The average thickness is preferably 0.3 to 10 from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin composition layer, and the patterning property, and 0.3.
Figure imgf000045_0001
Is more preferable, and 0.30! to 20! is particularly preferable.
[0196] (中間層の形成方法) [0196] (Method of forming intermediate layer)
中間層は、 中間層の形成に用いる成分と、 水溶性溶剤とを含有する中間層 形成用組成物を用いることにより形成することができる。 各成分を、 それぞ れ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、 得られた溶液をあらかじめ定めた割 合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。 以上の如く して調製した組成 物は、 孔径 3 . 0 のフイルター等を用いてろ過を行ってもよい。 The intermediate layer can be formed by using an intermediate layer forming composition containing a component used for forming the intermediate layer and a water-soluble solvent. It is also possible to prepare a composition by dissolving each component in a solvent in advance and then mixing the obtained solutions at a predetermined ratio. The composition thus prepared may be filtered using a filter having a pore size of 3.0.
本開示においては、 例えば、 中間層形成用組成物を仮支持体に塗布し、 乾 〇 2020/174767 44 卩(:171?2019/044334 In the present disclosure, for example, the composition for forming an intermediate layer is applied to a temporary support and dried. 〇 2020/174767 44 卩 (:171?2019/044334
燥させることで、 仮支持体上に中間層を形成することができる。 塗布方法と しては、 例えば、 スリッ ト塗布、 スピン塗布、 力ーテン塗布、 及びインクジ エッ ト塗布が挙げられる。 By drying, an intermediate layer can be formed on the temporary support. Examples of the coating method include slit coating, spin coating, pressure coating, and ink jet coating.
[0197] 水溶性溶剤としては、 例えば、 水、 及び炭素数 1〜 6のアルコールが挙げ られ、 水を含むことが好ましい。 炭素数 1〜 6のアルコールとしては、 例え ば、 メタノール、 エタノール、
Figure imgf000046_0001
_プロパノール、 イソプロパノール、
Figure imgf000046_0002
ブタノール、 11—ペンタノール、 及び —へキサノールが挙げられる。 上記 の中でも、 メタノール、 エタノール、 11—プロパノール、 及びイソプロパノ —ルよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも 1種であることが好ましい。
[0197] Examples of the water-soluble solvent include water and alcohols having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and preferably include water. Examples of alcohols having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methanol, ethanol,
Figure imgf000046_0001
_Propanol, Isopropanol,
Figure imgf000046_0002
Examples include butanol, 11-pentanol, and-hexanol. Among the above, at least one selected from the group consisting of methanol, ethanol, 11-propanol, and isopropanol is preferable.
[0198] 〔保護フィルム〕 [0198] [Protective film]
感光性転写材料は、 感光性転写材料における仮支持体が設けられた側の面 とは反対側の面に、 保護フィルムを有することが好ましい。 The photosensitive transfer material preferably has a protective film on the surface of the photosensitive transfer material opposite to the surface on which the temporary support is provided.
保護フィルムとしては、 例えば、 樹脂フィルム、 及び紙が挙げられ、 強度 及び可撓性等の観点から、 樹脂フィルムが好ましい。 樹脂フィルムとしては 、 例えば、 エチレンフィルム、 ポリプロピレンフィルム、 ポリエチレンテレ フタレートフイルム、 トリ酢酸セルロースフイルム、 ポリスチレンフイルム 、 及びポリカーボネートフィルムが挙げられる。 上記の中でも、 保護フィル ムは、 ポリエチレンフィルム、 ポリプロピレンフィルム、 又はポリエチレン テレフタレートフィルムが好ましい。 Examples of the protective film include a resin film and a paper, and a resin film is preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility. Examples of the resin film include an ethylene film, a polypropylene film, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among the above, the protective film is preferably a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, or a polyethylene terephthalate film.
[0199] 保護フィルムの平均厚さは、 制限されず、 例えば、 1
Figure imgf000046_0003
である ことが好ましい。 保護フィルムの平均厚さは、 上記ポリイミ ド基板の平均厚 さの測定方法に準ずる方法で測定する。
[0199] The average thickness of the protective film is not limited, for example, 1
Figure imgf000046_0003
Is preferred. The average thickness of the protective film is measured according to the method for measuring the average thickness of the above polyimide substrate.
[0200] 〔他の層〕 [0200] [Other layers]
感光性転写材料は、 上記以外の層 (以下、 「他の層」 ともいう。 ) を有し ていてもよい。 他の層としては、 例えば、 コントラストエンハンスメント層 、 及び熱可塑性樹脂層等を挙げることができる。 The photosensitive transfer material may have a layer other than the above (hereinafter, also referred to as "other layer"). Examples of the other layer include a contrast enhancement layer, a thermoplastic resin layer, and the like.
コントラストエンハンスメント層の好ましい態様については国際公開第 2 0 1 8 / 1 7 9 6 4 0号の段落 0 1 3 4、 熱可塑性樹脂層の好ましい態様に 〇 2020/174767 45 卩(:171?2019/044334 Regarding the preferred embodiment of the contrast enhancement layer, see paragraph 0 1 3 4 of International Publication No. 2 0 1 8/1 7 9 6 4 0, a preferred embodiment of the thermoplastic resin layer. 〇 2020/174767 45 卩 (:171?2019/044334
ついては特開 2 0 1 4 - 8 5 6 4 3号公報の段落 0 1 8 9〜段落 0 1 9 3、 及び、 更に他の層の好ましい態様については特開 2 0 1 4 - 8 5 6 4 3号公 報の段落〇 1 9 4〜段落 0 1 9 6にそれぞれ記載があり、 この公報の内容は 本明細書に組み込まれる。 For this, JP 0 1 4 8 5 6 4 3 JP, paragraphs 0 1 8 9 ~ paragraph 0 1 9 3 and, for a preferred embodiment of further layers, JP 2 0 1 4 8 5 6 4 There are descriptions in paragraphs 0 to 194 to 01996 of the No. 3 publication, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in this specification.
[0201 ] ここで図 1 を参照して、 感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を概略的に示す。 [0201] Here, referring to FIG. 1, an example of the layer structure of the photosensitive transfer material is schematically shown.
図 1 に示す感光性転写材料 1 〇〇は、 仮支持体 1 2と、 感光性樹脂組成物 層 1 4 _ 1及び中間層 1 4 _ 2を積層してなる転写層 1 4と、 保護フィルム 1 6とがこの順に積層されている。 転写層 1 4は、 既述した貼り合わせ工程 を経ることで、 ポリイミ ド基板上に転写 (すなわち、 積層) される層である The photosensitive transfer material 100 shown in Fig. 1 comprises a temporary support 12 and a transfer layer 14 formed by laminating a photosensitive resin composition layer 14_1 and an intermediate layer 14_2, and a protective film. 1 and 6 are laminated in this order. The transfer layer 14 is a layer that is transferred (that is, laminated) on the polyimide substrate by undergoing the above-described bonding process.
[0202] 〔感光性転写材料の製造方法〕 [0202] [Method for producing photosensitive transfer material]
感光性転写材料の製造方法としては、 制限されず、 公知の製造方法、 例え ば、 公知の各層の形成方法を用いることができる。 The method for producing the photosensitive transfer material is not limited, and a known production method, for example, a known method for forming each layer can be used.
[0203] 感光性転写材料の製造方法としては、 感光性樹脂組成物を仮支持体上に塗 布及び乾燥し感光性樹脂組成物層を形成する工程を含む方法が好ましく挙げ られる。 また、 感光性転写材料が中間層を有する場合には、 中間層形成用組 成物を仮支持体上に塗布及び乾燥し中間層を形成する工程、 並びに感光性樹 脂組成物を中間層上に塗布及び乾燥し感光性樹脂組成物層を形成する工程を 含む方法が好ましく挙げられる。 [0203] As a method for producing the photosensitive transfer material, a method including a step of applying a photosensitive resin composition on a temporary support and drying it to form a photosensitive resin composition layer is preferably exemplified. When the photosensitive transfer material has an intermediate layer, the step of coating the intermediate layer-forming composition on a temporary support and drying the intermediate layer to form the intermediate layer, and the photosensitive resin composition on the intermediate layer. Preferred is a method including a step of coating and drying to form a photosensitive resin composition layer.
また、 本開示に係る感光性転写材料の製造方法は、 上記感光性樹脂組成物 層を形成する工程の後に、 上記感光性樹脂組成物層上に保護フィルムを設け る工程をさらに含むことが好ましい。 Further, the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably further includes a step of providing a protective film on the photosensitive resin composition layer after the step of forming the photosensitive resin composition layer. ..
[0204] <回路基板の製造方法> [0204] <Method of manufacturing circuit board>
本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法は、 導電性層を有するポリイミ ド基板を 用い、 上記パターンつき基板の製造方法を適用して回路基板を製造する方法 であれば制限されない。 本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法は、 上記パターン つき基板の製造方法によりパターンつき基板を製造する工程 (以下、 「基板 製造工程」 ともいう。 ) と、 上記パターンつき基板において上記感光性樹脂 〇 2020/174767 46 卩(:171?2019/044334 The method of manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure is not limited as long as it is a method of manufacturing a circuit board using a polyimide substrate having a conductive layer and applying the method of manufacturing a patterned substrate described above. A method of manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure includes a step of manufacturing a patterned substrate by the method of manufacturing a patterned substrate (hereinafter, also referred to as a “substrate manufacturing step”), and the photosensitive resin in the patterned substrate. 〇 2020/174767 46 卩 (:171?2019/044334
組成物層のパターンが形成されていない領域に露出する上記導電性層をエッ チングする工程 (以下、 「エッチングエ程」 ともいう。 ) と、 上記感光性樹 脂組成物層のパターンを除去する工程 (以下、 「除去工程」 ともいう。 ) と 、 をこの順で有することが好ましい。 本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法は、 上記工程を有することで、 露光後の時間経過による回路配線の線幅の減少を 抑制でき、 かつ、 高温条件下でのラミネート適性に優れる。 A step of etching the conductive layer exposed in the region where the pattern of the composition layer is not formed (hereinafter, also referred to as "etching step"), and removing the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer. It is preferable that the steps (hereinafter, also referred to as “removing step”) and are in this order. Since the circuit board manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes the above steps, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the line width of the circuit wiring due to the lapse of time after exposure, and it is excellent in the suitability for lamination under high temperature conditions.
[0205] また、 本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法の好ましい実施形態として、 上記 除去工程後に、 上記貼り合わせ工程、 上記露光工程、 上記現像工程、 及び上 記エッチングエ程の 4工程を 1セッ トとして、 上記セッ トを複数回繰り返す 方法が挙げられる。 上記方法により、 例えば、 互いに異なる 2層以上の導電 性パターンを形成できる。 [0205] As a preferred embodiment of the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure, after the removing step, the bonding step, the exposing step, the developing step, and the etching step described above are set as one set. As an example, there is a method of repeating the above set a plurality of times. By the above method, for example, two or more conductive patterns different from each other can be formed.
[0206] 本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法の好ましい実施形態としては、 上記エッ チングエ程、 上記除去工程の前に、 上記感光性樹脂組成物層のパターンに対 して上記露光工程を行い、 次いで、 上記現像工程をさらに行う方法が挙げら れる。 上記方法により、 例えば、 互いに異なる 2層以上の導電性パターンを 形成できる。 [0206] As a preferred embodiment of the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure, the etching step, the exposure step is performed on the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer before the removal step, Next, there may be mentioned a method of further performing the developing step. By the above method, for example, two or more different conductive patterns can be formed.
[0207] また、 ポリイミ ド基板は再利用 (リワーク) できる。 感光性樹脂組成物層 では、 活性光線を照射することにより、 例えば活性光線を照射されて酸を発 生する感光剤等を用いて露光部の溶解性を高めるため、 バターン露光時点で は露光部及び未露光部がいずれも硬化せず、 得られたパターン形状が不良で あった場合には全面露光などによって基板を再利用 (リワーク) できる。 [0207] In addition, the polyimide substrate can be reused (rework). When the photosensitive resin composition layer is exposed to actinic rays, for example, the solubility of the exposed areas is increased by using, for example, a photosensitizer that generates acid upon irradiation with the active rays. If neither the unexposed portion nor the unexposed portion is cured and the obtained pattern shape is defective, the substrate can be reused (reworked) by exposing the entire surface.
[0208] 本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法の実施形態としては、 国際公開第 2 0 0 [0208] As an embodiment of the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure, there is a method disclosed in International Publication No.
6 / 1 9 0 4 0 5号を参考にすることができ、 この内容は本明細書に組み込 まれる。 No. 6/190,405 can be consulted, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
[0209] [基板製造工程] [0209] [Substrate manufacturing process]
本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法は、 上記パターンつき基板の製造方法に よりパターンつき基板を製造する工程を有することが好ましい。 上記工程に おいて、 パターンつき基板に含まれるポリイミ ド基板は、 導電性層を有し、 〇 2020/174767 47 卩(:171?2019/044334 The method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure preferably has a step of manufacturing a patterned board by the method for manufacturing a patterned board. In the above process, the polyimide substrate included in the patterned substrate has a conductive layer, 〇 2020/174767 47 卩 (:171?2019/044334
少なくとも一方の表面に導電性層を有することが好ましい。 パターンつき基 板の製造方法及び上記方法において使用される各材料の実施形態については 、 上記 「バターンつき基板の製造方法」 の項において説明したとおりであり 、 好ましい実施形態も同様である。 It is preferable to have a conductive layer on at least one surface. The embodiment of the method for producing a patterned substrate and each material used in the above method is as described in the above section “Method for producing a substrate with a pattern”, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
[0210] [エッチングエ程] [0210] [Etching process]
本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法は、 上記/《ターンつき基板において上記 感光性樹脂組成物層のパターンが形成されていない領域に露出する上記導電 性層をエッチングする工程を有することが好ましい。 The method for producing a circuit board according to the present disclosure preferably has a step of etching the conductive layer exposed in a region where the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer is not formed in the /<<turned substrate.
[021 1 ] エッチングエ程においては、 上記現像工程により形成された感光性樹脂組 成物層のパターン (すなわち、 樹脂バターン) を、 エッチングレジストとし て使用し、 上記導電性層のエッチング処理を行う。 [021 1] In the etching step, the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer (that is, the resin pattern) formed by the developing process is used as an etching resist to perform the etching treatment of the conductive layer. ..
[0212] エッチング処理の方法としては、 制限されず、 公知の方法を適用できる。 [0212] The method of etching treatment is not limited and known methods can be applied.
エッチング処理の方法としては、 例えば、 特開 2 0 1 0— 1 5 2 1 5 5号公 報の段落〇〇 4 8〜段落 0 0 5 4等に記載の方法、 及び公知のプラズマエッ チング等のドライエッチングによる方法が挙げられる。 Examples of the etching method include, for example, the method described in paragraphs 〇 〇 48 to paragraph 0 0 5 4 of JP-A No. 2010-1515 2155, and known plasma etching. The dry etching method may be used.
[0213] エッチング処理の方法としては、 例えば、 一般的に行われている、 エッチ ング液に浸潰するウェッ トエッチング法が挙げられる。 ウェッ トエッチング に用いられるエッチング液は、 エッチングの対象に合わせて酸性タイプ又は アルカリ性タイプのエッチング液を適宜選択すればよい。 [0213] As a method of the etching treatment, for example, a generally used wet etching method of immersing in an etching liquid can be mentioned. As the etching solution used for wet etching, an acidic type or alkaline type etching solution may be appropriately selected according to the object of etching.
酸性タイプのエッチング液としては、 例えば、 塩酸、 硫酸、 フッ酸、 リン 酸等の酸性成分単独の水溶液、 及び酸性成分と塩化第二鉄、 フッ化アンモニ ウム、 過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩との混合水溶液が例示される。 酸性成分 は、 複数の酸性成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。 Examples of the acidic type etching solution include an aqueous solution containing only an acidic component such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid and phosphoric acid, and an acidic component and a salt such as ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride and potassium permanganate. A mixed aqueous solution is exemplified. As the acidic component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
アルカリ性タイプのエッチング液としては、 例えば、 水酸化ナトリウム、 水酸化カリウム、 アンモニア、 有機アミン、 テトラメチルアンモニウムハイ ドロオキサイ ドのような有機アミンの塩等のアルカリ成分単独の水溶液、 及 びアルカリ成分と過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩との混合水溶液等が例示され る。 アルカリ成分は、 複数のアルカリ成分を組み合わせた成分を使用しても 〇 2020/174767 48 卩(:171?2019/044334 As the alkaline type etching solution, for example, an aqueous solution of an alkali component alone such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, an organic amine, a salt of an organic amine such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, or an alkaline solution and an alkaline solution. Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution with a salt such as potassium manganate. Even if you use a combination of multiple alkaline components, 〇 2020/174 767 48 卩 (:171?2019/044334
よい。 Good.
[0214] エッチング液の温度は、 制限されないが、 4 5 °〇以下であることが好まし い。 本開示においてエッチングマスク (エッチングバターン) として使用さ れる樹脂パターンは、 4 5 °〇以下の温度域における酸性及びアルカリ性のエ ッチング液に対して特に優れた耐性を発揮することが好ましい。 したがって 、 エッチングエ程中に感光性樹脂組成物層が剥離することが防止され、 感光 性樹脂組成物層の存在しない部分が選択的にエッチングされることになる。 エッチングエ程後、 工程ラインの汚染を防ぐために、 必要に応じて、 エッ チング処理された基板を洗浄する洗浄工程、 及び洗浄された基板を乾燥する 乾燥工程を行ってもよい。 [0214] The temperature of the etching solution is not limited, but it is preferably 45° or less. The resin pattern used as an etching mask (etching pattern) in the present disclosure preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45° or lower. Therefore, the photosensitive resin composition layer is prevented from peeling off during the etching process, and the portion where the photosensitive resin composition layer does not exist is selectively etched. After the etching process, in order to prevent contamination of the process line, a cleaning process of cleaning the etched substrate and a drying process of drying the cleaned substrate may be performed, if necessary.
[021 5] [除去工程] [021 5] [Removal process]
本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法は、 上記感光性樹脂組成物層のパターン を除去する工程を有することが好ましい。 The method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure preferably has a step of removing the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer.
除去工程は、 特に制限はなく、 必要に応じて行うことができるが、 エッチ ングエ程の後に行うことが好ましい。 The removing step is not particularly limited and may be performed as necessary, but is preferably performed after the etching step.
残存する感光性樹脂組成物層を除去する方法としては特に制限はないが、 薬品処理により除去する方法を挙げることができ、 除去液を用いることが特 に好ましく挙げることができる。 The method of removing the remaining photosensitive resin composition layer is not particularly limited, but a method of removing it by a chemical treatment can be mentioned, and it is particularly preferable to use a removing solution.
感光性樹脂組成物層の除去方法としては、 好ましくは 3 0 °〇〜8 0 °〇、 よ り好ましくは 5 0 °〇〜 8 0 °〇にて撹拌中の除去液に感光性樹脂組成物層など を有する基板を 1分〜 3 0分間浸潰する方法が挙げられる。 As a method for removing the photosensitive resin composition layer, the photosensitive resin composition is preferably added to the removing solution under stirring at 30° to 80°, more preferably 50° to 80°. A method of immersing a substrate having layers and the like for 1 to 30 minutes can be mentioned.
[0216] 除去液としては、 例えば、 水酸化ナトリウム、 水酸化カリウム等の無機ア ルカリ成分、 又は、 第 1級アミン化合物、 第 2級アミン化合物、 第 3級アミ ン化合物、 第 4級アンモニウム塩化合物等の有機アルカリ成分を水、 ジメチ ルスルホキシド、 1\1 _メチルピロリ ドン又はこれらの混合溶液に溶解させた 除去液が挙げられる。 [0216] Examples of the removing liquid include inorganic alkali components such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, or primary amine compounds, secondary amine compounds, tertiary amine compounds, and quaternary ammonium salts. Examples of the removal solution include an organic alkaline component such as a compound dissolved in water, dimethylsulfoxide, 1\1_methylpyrrolidone, or a mixed solution thereof.
また、 除去液を使用し、 スプレー法、 シャワー法、 パドル法等により除去 してもよい。 〇 2020/174767 49 卩(:171?2019/044334 Alternatively, a removing solution may be used to remove the particles by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like. 〇2020/174767 49 卩(:171?2019/044334
[0217] [全面露光工程] [0217] [Overall exposure process]
本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法は、 上記エッチングする工程 (エッチン グエ程) と上記除去する工程 (除去工程) との間に、 上記感光性樹脂組成物 層を全面露光する工程 (以下、 「全面露光工程」 ともいう。 ) を有すること が好ましい。 The method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure includes a step of exposing the entire surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer between the etching step (etching step) and the removing step (removing step) (hereinafter, referred to as “ It is also referred to as "entire surface exposure step").
[0218] さらに、 本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法は、 必要に応じて、 全面露光さ れた感光性樹脂組成物層を加熱する工程 (以下、 「加熱工程」 ともいう。 ) を有していてもよい。 全面露光工程及び加熱工程は、 エッチングエ程後、 除 去工程前に行われることが好ましい。 [0218] Further, the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure has a step of heating the whole surface-exposed photosensitive resin composition layer (hereinafter, also referred to as "heating step"), if necessary. May be. The whole surface exposure step and the heating step are preferably performed after the etching step and before the removing step.
[0219] エッチングエ程後に、 エッチングマスクとして使用した感光性樹脂組成物 層を全面露光することにより、 除去液への溶解性及び除去液の浸透性が向上 し、 除去液を長時間使用した場合においても除去性に優れる。 また、 加熱エ 程を含む場合、 加熱工程により、 光酸発生剤の反応速度、 及び発生した酸と 感光性樹脂との反応速度をより向上することができ、 結果、 除去性能が向上 する。 [0219] After the etching process, by exposing the entire surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer used as the etching mask, the solubility in the removal liquid and the permeability of the removal liquid are improved, and the removal liquid is used for a long time. Also has excellent removability. Further, when the heating step is included, the heating step can further improve the reaction rate of the photo-acid generator and the reaction rate of the generated acid and the photosensitive resin, and as a result, the removal performance is improved.
[0220] 全面露光工程における露光に使用する光源としては、 制限されず、 公知の 露光光源を用いることができる。 除去性の観点から、 上記露光工程と同じ波 長の光を含む光源を用いることが好ましい。 [0220] The light source used for the exposure in the overall exposure step is not limited, and a known exposure light source can be used. From the viewpoint of removability, it is preferable to use a light source containing light having the same wavelength as that in the exposure step.
[0221 ] 全面露光工程における露光量は、 除去性の観点から、 5 」/〇 2〜 1 ,
Figure imgf000051_0001
[0221] From the viewpoint of removability, the exposure amount in the whole surface exposure step is 5"/○ 2 ~ 1,
Figure imgf000051_0001
Figure imgf000051_0002
Figure imgf000051_0002
あることが特に好ましい。 It is particularly preferable that
[0222] 全面露光工程における露光量は、 除去性の観点から、 上記露光工程におけ る露光量以上であることが好ましく、 上記露光工程における露光量よりも多 いことがより好ましい。 [0222] From the viewpoint of removability, the exposure amount in the whole surface exposure step is preferably equal to or more than the exposure amount in the above exposure step, and more preferably more than the exposure amount in the above exposure step.
[0223] [他の工程] [0223] [Other processes]
本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法は、 上記以外の工程 (以下、 「他の工程 」 ともいう。 ) を有していてもよい。 他の工程としては、 例えば、 以下に示 〇 2020/174767 50 卩(:171?2019/044334 The method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure may include steps (hereinafter, also referred to as “other steps”) other than the above. Other steps include, for example: 〇 2020/174767 50 卩 (:171?2019/044334
す工程が挙げられるが、 これらの工程に制限されない。 However, the present invention is not limited to these steps.
また、 本開示における露光工程、 現像工程、 及び他の工程の例としては、 特開 2 0 0 6 _ 2 3 6 9 6号公報の段落 0 0 3 5〜段落 0 0 5 1 に記載の方 法を本開示においても好適に用いることができる。 Further, as an example of the exposure step, the development step, and other steps in the present disclosure, those described in paragraphs 0 0 3 5 to 0 0 5 1 of JP-A No. The method can be preferably used in the present disclosure.
[0224] (保護フィルム剥離工程) [0224] (Protective film peeling process)
感光性転写材料が保護フィルムを有する場合、 本開示に係る回路基板の製 造方法は、 上記感光性転写材料の保護フィルムを剥離する工程を有すること が好ましい。 保護フィルムを剥離する方法としては、 制限されず、 公知の方 法を適用することができる。 When the photosensitive transfer material has a protective film, the method for producing a circuit board according to the present disclosure preferably has a step of peeling the protective film of the photosensitive transfer material. The method for peeling off the protective film is not limited, and a known method can be applied.
[0225] (可視光線反射率を低下させる工程) [0225] (Process of reducing visible light reflectance)
本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法は、 ポリイミ ド基板上の導電性層の一部 又は全ての可視光線反射率を低下させる処理をする工程を含むことが可能で ある。 The method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure can include a step of reducing the visible light reflectance of part or all of the conductive layer on the polyimide board.
可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、 例えば、 酸化処理が挙げられ る。 例えば、 銅を酸化処理により酸化銅とすることで、 黒化することにより 、 可視光線反射率を低下させることができる。 Examples of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include oxidation treatment. For example, visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening by converting copper into copper oxide by an oxidation treatment.
可視光線反射率を低下させる処理の好ましい態様については、 特開 2 0 1 4 - 1 5 0 1 1 8号公報の段落 0 0 1 7〜段落 0 0 2 5、 並びに、 特開 2 0 1 3 - 2 0 6 3 1 5号公報の段落 0 0 4 1、 段落 0 0 4 2、 段落 0 0 4 8及 び段落〇〇 5 8に記載があり、 この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As for a preferable embodiment of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance, paragraphs 0 0 1 7 to 0 0 2 5 of JP-A 2 0 1 4-1 5 0 1 1 8 gazette, and JP 2 0 1 3 1 -Paragraph 0 0 4 1, Paragraph 0 0 4 2, Paragraph 0 0 4 8 and Paragraph 0 0 58 of Publication No. 2 0 6 3 15 are described, and the contents of this publication are incorporated into this specification. ..
[0226] (絶縁膜を形成する工程、 及び絶縁膜上に新たな導電性層を形成する工程) 本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法は、 ポリイミ ド基板上に形成された導電 性パターン上に絶縁膜を形成する工程と、 上記絶縁膜上に新たな導電性層を 形成する工程と、 を有することも好ましい。 (Step of Forming Insulating Film, and Step of Forming New Conductive Layer on Insulating Film) A method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure is provided on a conductive pattern formed on a polyimide substrate. It is also preferable to have a step of forming an insulating film and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film.
上記構成により、 新たな導電性層を、 先に形成した導電性パターンと絶縁 しつつ、 形成することができる。 With the above structure, a new conductive layer can be formed while being insulated from the conductive pattern previously formed.
絶縁膜を形成する工程としては、 制限されず、 公知の永久膜を形成する方 法が挙げられる。 また、 絶縁性を有する感光性材料を用いて、 フォトリソグ 〇 2020/174767 51 卩(:171?2019/044334 The step of forming the insulating film is not limited, and a known method of forming a permanent film can be used. In addition, using a photosensitive material with insulating properties, photolithography 〇 2020/174767 51 卩 (:171?2019/044334
ラフイにより所望のパターンの絶縁膜を形成してもよい。 An insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by roughing.
絶縁膜上に新たな導電性層を形成する工程としては、 制限されず、 導電性 を有する感光性材料を用いて、 フォトリソグラフイにより所望のパターンの 新たな導電性層を形成してもよい。 The step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film is not limited, and a new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity. ..
[0227] 本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法は、 両方の表面にそれぞれ複数の導電性 層を有するポリイミ ド基板を用い、 ポリイミ ド基板の両方の表面に形成され た導電性層に対して逐次又は同時に回路を形成することも好ましい。 上記構 成により、 ポリイミ ド基板の _方の表面に第 _の導電パターン、 及び他方の 表面に第二の導電パターンを形成したタッチパネル用回路配線を形成するこ とができる。 また、 上記構成のタッチパネル用回路配線を、 口ールツーロー ルでポリイミ ド基板の両面に形成することも好ましい。 [0227] A method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure uses a polyimide substrate having a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces, and sequentially applies the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the polyimide substrate. Alternatively, it is also preferable to form a circuit at the same time. The above configuration, it is the child form _ square of the _ conductive pattern on the surface, and the second conductive pattern touch panel circuit wiring formed of the other surface of the polyimide substrate. Further, it is also preferable to form the touch panel circuit wiring having the above-described configuration on both surfaces of the polyimide substrate by means of a hole-to-roll method.
[0228] 本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法により製造される回路基板は、 種々の装 置に適用することができる。 本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法により製造さ れる回路基板を備えた装置としては、 例えば、 入力装置が挙げられ、 タッチ パネルであることが好ましく、 静電容量型タッチパネルであることがより好 ましい。 また、 上記入力装置は、 例えば、 有機日 1_表示装置、 液晶表示装置 等の表示装置に適用することができる。 The circuit board manufactured by the circuit board manufacturing method according to the present disclosure can be applied to various devices. An example of a device provided with a circuit board manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure is an input device, which is preferably a touch panel, and more preferably a capacitive touch panel. Yes. Further, the input device can be applied to a display device such as an organic display device, a liquid crystal display device, or the like.
[0229] <タッチパネルの製造方法> [0229] <Method for manufacturing touch panel>
本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法の一実施形態は、 上記回路基板の製 造方法を含む。 One embodiment of the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes the circuit board manufacturing method.
[0230] また、 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法の他の一実施形態は、 上記回 路基板の製造方法により製造された回路基板を準備する工程を有する。 上記 実施形態においては、 本開示に係る回路基板により製造された回路基板を用 いてタッチパネルを製造する。 [0230] Another embodiment of the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure has a step of preparing a circuit board manufactured by the circuit board manufacturing method. In the above embodiment, the touch panel is manufactured using the circuit board manufactured by the circuit board according to the present disclosure.
[0231 ] 上記各実施形態において、 回路基板の製造方法の実施形態については、 上 記 「回路基板の製造方法」 の項において説明したとおりであり、 好ましい実 施形態も同様である。 [0231] In each of the above-described embodiments, the embodiment of the method for manufacturing a circuit board is as described in the above section "Method for manufacturing a circuit board", and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
[0232] 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法について、 上記事項以外は公知の夕 〇 2020/174767 52 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0232] Regarding the method for manufacturing the touch panel according to the present disclosure, other than the above-mentioned matters, a public 〇2020/174767 52 卩(:171?2019/044334
ッチパネルの製造方法を参照することができる。 The manufacturing method of the touch panel can be referred to.
また、 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法は、 上記事項以外の任意のエ 程 (他の工程) を有していてもよい。 Further, the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may have any process (other process) other than the above matters.
[0233] 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法において用いられるマスクのバター ンの一例を、 図 2及び図 3に示す。 [0233] An example of a mask pattern used in the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is shown in Figs.
図 2に示されるバターン、 及び図 3に示されるパターンにおいて、 S L及 び Gは、 非画像部 (遮光部) であり、 D Lは、 アライメント合わせの枠を仮 想的に示したものである。 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法において、 例えば、 図 2に示されるパターンを有するマスクを介して感光性樹脂組成物 層を露光することで、 S L及び Gに対応するパターンを有する回路配線が形 成されたタッチパネルを製造できる。 具体的には、 国際公開第 201 6/0 1 90405号の図 1 に記載の方法で作製できる。 製造されたタッチパネル の一例においては、 Gは透明電極 (タッチパネル用電極) が形成される部分 であり、 S Lは周辺取出し部の配線が形成される部分である。 In the pattern shown in FIG. 2 and the pattern shown in FIG. 3, SL and G are non-image areas (light-shielding areas), and DL is a virtual frame for alignment. In the method for manufacturing a touch panel according to the present disclosure, for example, by exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer through a mask having a pattern shown in FIG. 2, circuit wiring having a pattern corresponding to SL and G is formed. Touch panel can be manufactured. Specifically, it can be prepared by the method described in FIG. 1 of WO2016/0 1 90405. In an example of the manufactured touch panel, G is a portion where a transparent electrode (touch panel electrode) is formed, and S L is a portion where the wiring of the peripheral extraction portion is formed.
[0234] 本開示に係るタッチパネルは、 本開示に係る回路基板の製造方法により製 造された回路基板を少なくとも有するタッチパネルである。 また、 本開示に 係るタッチパネルは、 透明基板と、 電極と、 絶縁層又は保護層と、 を少なく とも有することが好ましい。 The touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel that includes at least a circuit board manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to the present disclosure. Further, the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably has at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
本開示に係るタッチパネルにおける検出方法としては、 抵抗膜方式、 静電 容量方式、 超音波方式、 電磁誘導方式、 及び、 光学方式など公知の方式いず れでもよい。 上記の中でも、 静電容量方式が好ましい。 The detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure may be any known method such as a resistance film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method. Among the above, the capacitance method is preferable.
タッチパネル型としては、 いわゆる、 インセル型 (例えば、 特表 201 2 - 5 1 705 1号公報の図 5、 図 6、 図 7、 図 8に記載のもの) 、 いわゆる 、 オンセル型 (例えば、 特開 201 3 - 1 681 25号公報の図 1 9に記載 のもの、 特開 201 2-89 1 02号公報の図 1及び図 5に記載のもの) 、 As the touch panel type, there are so-called in-cell type (for example, those shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of Japanese Patent Publication No. 201 2 -5 1 705 1), so-called on-cell type (for example, JP No. 201 3-1 681 25 shown in FIG. 19 of JP, JP-A No. 201-89 102 shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 5),
0 G S (O n e G l a s s S o l u t i o n) 型、 TO L (T o u c h -o n -L e n s) 型 (例えば、 特開 201 3-54727号公報の図 2に 記載のもの) 、 その他の構成 (例えば、 特開 201 3 _ 1 6487 1号公報 〇 2020/174767 53 卩(:171?2019/044334 0 GS (One Glass Solution) type, TO L (Touch-on-Lens) type (for example, the one shown in FIG. 2 of JP-A-2013-54727), and other configurations (for example, JP 201 3 _ 1 6487 1 Publication 〇 2020/174767 53 卩 (: 171?2019/044334
の図 6に記載のもの) 、 各種アウトセル型 (いわゆる、 0 0 , 0 1 . 0 2、 ◦ 、 〇 2、 〇 1、 〇 1 など) 等を挙げることができる。 Of FIG. 6), various out-cell types (so-called 0 0, 0 1.02, ◦, 0 2, 0 1, 0 1, etc.) and the like.
[0235] <積層体> [0235] <Laminate>
本開示に係る積層体は、 ポリイミ ド基板と、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上 である酸分解性樹脂を含有する感光性樹脂組成物層と、 を有する。 本開示に 係る積層体が上記構成を有することで、 本開示に係る積層体を露光した場合 に露光後における感光性樹脂組成物層中の酸の過剰な拡散を抑制できるため 、 感光性樹脂組成物層の過剰な酸分解反応を抑制できる。 このため、 露光後 の時間経過によるパターンの線幅の減少を抑制できる。 The laminate according to the present disclosure has a polyimide substrate and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher. Since the laminate according to the present disclosure has the above-mentioned configuration, when the laminate according to the present disclosure is exposed, it is possible to suppress excessive diffusion of an acid in the photosensitive resin composition layer after exposure. The excessive acid decomposition reaction of the material layer can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the line width of the pattern due to the passage of time after the exposure.
[0236] 本開示に係る積層体において、 ポリイミ ド基板、 及び感光性樹脂組成物層 の実施形態については、 上記 「パターンつき基板の製造方法」 において説明 したとおりであり、 好ましい実施形態も同様である。 [0236] In the laminate according to the present disclosure, the embodiments of the polyimide substrate and the photosensitive resin composition layer are as described in the above "Method for producing a patterned substrate", and the preferred embodiments are also the same. is there.
[0237] 本開示に係る積層体において、 感光性樹脂組成物層は、 転写によって形成 されてなる層であることが好ましい。 転写によって形成されてなる層は、 後 述する感光性転写材料を用いる方法 (すなわち、 感光性転写材料及びポリイ ミ ド基板を貼り合わせる方法) によって形成できる。 [0237] In the laminate according to the present disclosure, the photosensitive resin composition layer is preferably a layer formed by transfer. The layer formed by transfer can be formed by a method using a photosensitive transfer material described later (that is, a method of bonding the photosensitive transfer material and a polyimide substrate).
[0238] また、 ポリイミ ド基板が導電性を有する場合、 本開示に係る積層体は、 ポ リイミ ド基板と、 導電性層と、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上である酸分解性 樹脂を含有する感光性樹脂組成物層と、 をこの順で有することが好ましい。 [0238] In addition, when the polyimide substrate has conductivity, the laminate according to the present disclosure includes a polyimide substrate, a conductive layer, and an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C or higher. It is preferable to have a photosensitive resin composition layer to be contained in this order.
[0239] 本開示に係る積層体の製造方法としては、 制限されず、 例えば、 上記 「パ ターンつき基板の製造方法」 において説明した 「貼り合わせ工程」 により積 層体を製造する方法が挙げられる。 すなわち、 仮支持体と、 ガラス転移温度 (丁 9) が 5 0 °〇以上である酸分解性樹脂を含有する感光性樹脂組成物層と 、 を有する感光性転写材料における上記感光性樹脂組成物層、 及びポリイミ ド基板を接触させて、 上記感光性転写材料と上記ポリイミ ド基板とを貼り合 わせることで、 本開示に係る積層体を製造できる。 また、 本開示に係る積層 体は、 ポリイミ ド基板上に既述の感光性樹脂組成物を塗布することにより製 造されてもよい。 \¥0 2020/174767 54 ?(:17 2019/044334 [0239] The method for producing a laminated body according to the present disclosure is not limited, and examples thereof include a method for producing a laminated body by the "bonding step" described in the above "Method for producing a substrate with a pattern". .. That is, the above-mentioned photosensitive resin composition in a photosensitive transfer material, comprising: a temporary support; and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature (Cho 9) of 50° or more. The layered product according to the present disclosure can be manufactured by bringing the layer and the polyimide substrate into contact with each other and bonding the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate together. Further, the laminate according to the present disclosure may be manufactured by applying the above-mentioned photosensitive resin composition onto a polyimide substrate. \\0 2020/174 767 54 ?(: 17 2019/044334
実施例 Example
[0240] 以下、 実施例により本開示を詳細に説明するが、 本開示はこれらに制限さ れるものではない。 なお、 特に断りのない限り、 「部」 、 「%」 は質量基準 である。 [0240] Hereinafter, the present disclosure will be described in detail with reference to Examples, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto. Unless otherwise specified, "part" and "%" are based on mass.
[0241 ] <略号> [0241] <Abbreviation>
実施例で使用される以下の略語は、 それぞれ、 下記の化合物を表す。 The following abbreviations used in the examples refer to the compounds below, respectively.
- 「1\/1八丁1~1 」 : 2 -テトラヒドロフラニルメタクリレート (合成品、 環 状エーテル基をエステル位に有するメタクリレート化合物) -"1\/1 Hatcho 1 to 1": 2-Tetrahydrofuranyl methacrylate (synthetic product, a methacrylate compound having a cyclic ether group at the ester position)
- 「丁1~1 1~1 3」 : 4 - (2 -テトラヒドロフラニルオキシ) スチレン (合 成品) -"Ding 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 3": 4-(2-tetrahydrofuranyloxy) styrene (synthetic product)
- 「八丁1~1 」 : 2 -テトラヒドロフラニルアクリレート (合成品、 環状エ —テル基をエステル位に有するアクリレート化合物) -"Haccho 1 to 1": 2-Tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (synthetic product, acrylate compound having cyclic ether group at ester position)
- 「!\/! 」 : メタクリル酸 (東京化成工業株式会社製) -"!\/!": Methacrylic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
- 「1\/1 1\/1 」 : メタクリル酸メチル (東京化成工業株式会社製、 直鎖状アル キル基をエステル位に有するメタクリレート化合物) -"1\/1 1\/1": Methyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., a methacrylate compound having a linear alkyl group at the ester position)
- 「〇1~1 1\/1 」 : メタクリル酸シクロヘキシル (東京化成工業株式会社製、 環状アルキル基をエステル位に有するメタクリレート化合物) -"○ 1 ~ 1 1\/1": Cyclohexyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., a methacrylate compound having a cyclic alkyl group at the ester position)
- 「巳 」 : アクリル酸エチル (東京化成工業株式会社製、 直鎖状アルキル 基をエステル位に有するアクリレート化合物) -"Mi": Ethyl acrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., an acrylate compound having a linear alkyl group at the ester position)
- 「巳 1~1 1\/1 」 : メタクリル酸 2 -エチルヘキシル (東京化成工業株式会社 製、 分岐状アルキル基をエステル位に有するメタクリレート化合物)-"Mi 1 ~ 1 1\/1": 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., a methacrylate compound having a branched alkyl group at the ester position)
-
Figure imgf000056_0001
: メタクリル酸 1 , 2 , 2 , 6 , 6 -ペンタメチルー 4 -ピ ペリジル (株式会社
Figure imgf000056_0002
-
Figure imgf000056_0001
: Methacrylic acid 1, 2, 2, 2, 6, 6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl (Ltd.
Figure imgf000056_0002
- 「1\/1巳 1~1〇」 : 4—メ トキシフエノール (東京化成工業株式会社製)-"1\/1 Sumi 1 ~ 10": 4—Methoxyphenol (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
- 「 ー6 0 1」 : 2 , 2, ーアゾビス (2 -メチルプロピオン酸) ジメチ ル (富士フイルム和光純薬株式会社製) -"-6 01": 2, 2, -azobis (2-methylpropionic acid) dimethyl (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
[0242] <1\/1八丁1~1 の合成> [0242] <1 \ / 1 synthesis of Hatcho 1 to 1>
3つロフラスコにメタクリル酸 (8 6 . 1質量部、 1 . 0モル当量) 、 及 〇 2020/174767 55 卩(:171?2019/044334 Methacrylic acid (86.1 parts by mass, 1.0 molar equivalent) in 3 flasks, and 〇 2020/174767 55 卩 (:171?2019/044334
びヘキサン (86. 1質量部) を加えて 20°〇に冷却した。 上記 3つロフラ スコにカンファースルホン酸 (〇. 00070質量部、 〇. 03ミリモル当 量) 、 及び 2—ジヒドロフラン (7〇. 1質量部、 1. 0モル当量) を滴下 した後に、 20°〇±2°〇の温度範囲で1. 5時間撹拌した。 次に、 液温を 3 5°〇まで昇温した後、 2時間撹拌した。 ヌッチエにキヨーワード 200、 及 びキヨーワード 1 000 (共に協和化学工業株式会社製) をこの順に敷き詰 めた後、 反応液をろ過することでろ過液を得た。 得られたろ過液に 1\/1巳 1~1(3 (4 -メ トキシフエノール (東京化成工業株式会社製) 、 〇 . 001 2質量 部) を加えた後、 40°〇で減圧濃縮することで、 2 -テトラヒドロフラニル メタクリレート (1\/1八丁1~1 、 メタクリル酸テトラヒドロー 2 !!-フランー 2—イル) 1 56. 2質量部を無色油状物として得た (収率 98. 0%) 。 And hexane (86.1 parts by mass) were added and the mixture was cooled to 20 ° . After adding camphor sulfonic acid (○0.00070 parts by mass, 〇.03 mmol equivalent) and 2-dihydrofuran (70.1 parts by mass, 1.0 molar equivalent) to the above three roflasco, 20°C was added. It was stirred for 1.5 hours in the temperature range of ±2°. Next, the liquid temperature was raised to 35° and then stirred for 2 hours. Kyoward 200 and Kyoward 1 000 (both manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) were laid in this order in this order, and the reaction solution was filtered to obtain a filtrate. To the obtained filtrate, add 1\/1 and 1 to 1 (3 (4-methoxyphenol (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 0.001 2 parts by mass), and concentrate at 40 ° under reduced pressure. Thus, 2-tetrahydrofuranyl methacrylate (1\/1 8chome 1 to 1, tetrahydro-2!!-furan-2-yl methacrylate) 1 56.2 parts by mass was obtained as a colorless oil (yield 98.0% ).
[0243] <丁 1~1 1~13の合成> [0243] <Synthesis of Ding 1 to 1 1 to 13,>
3つロフラスコに 4 -ヒドロキシスチレン ( 1 2〇. 2質量部、 1. 〇モ ル当量) 、 及びヘキサン (1 20. 2質量部) を加え 20°〇に冷却した。 上 記 3つロフラスコにカンファースルホン酸 (〇. 00070質量部、 0. 0 3ミリモル当量) 、 及び 2—ジヒドロフラン (7〇. 1質量部、 1. 0モル 当量) を滴下した後に、 80°〇まで昇温して 5時間撹拌した。 ヌッチエにキ ヨーワード 200、 及びキヨーワード 1 000 (共に協和化学工業株式会社 製) をこの順に敷き詰めた後、 反応液をろ過することでろ過液を得た。 得ら れたろ過液に 1\/!巳 1~1〇 (〇. 001 9質量部) を加えた後、 40°〇で減圧濃 縮することで、 4 - (2 -テトラヒドロフラニルオキシ) スチレン (丁 1~1 1~13、 4 - (2—テトラヒドロフラニルオキシ) スチレン) 1 85. 0質量 部を無色油状物として得た (収率 97. 3%) 。 4-Hydroxystyrene (10.2 0.2 parts by mass, 1.0 mol equivalent) and hexane (10.2 parts by mass) were added to the three flasks and cooled to 20 ° . After adding camphorsulfonic acid (○0.00070 parts by mass, 0.03 mmol equivalent) and 2-dihydrofuran (70.1 parts by mass, 1.0 molar equivalent) to the above three flasks at 80 ° The temperature was raised to 0 and stirred for 5 hours. Kyoward 200 and Kyoward 1 000 (both manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) were spread in this order in this order, and the reaction solution was filtered to obtain a filtrate. To the obtained filtrate, 1\/! 1 to 1 〇 (10.001 9 parts by mass) was added, and the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure at 40° 〇 to give 4-(2-tetrahydrofuranyloxy)styrene. (1 to 11 to 13, 4-(2-tetrahydrofuranyloxy)styrene) 1 85.0 parts by mass was obtained as a colorless oil (yield 97.3%).
[0244] <八丁 1~1 の合成> [0244] <Synthesis of Hatcho 1 to 1>
3つロフラスコにアクリル酸 (72. 1質量部、 ·! . 0モル当量) 、 及び ヘキサン (72. 1質量部) を加え 20°〇に冷却した。 上記 3つロフラスコ にカンファースルホン酸 (〇. 00070質量部、 〇. 03ミリモル当量) Acrylic acid (72.1 parts by mass, ...!.0 molar equivalent) and hexane (72.1 parts by mass) were added to the three flasks and cooled to 20°. Camphor sulfonic acid (○0.00070 parts by mass, 〇0.03 mmol equivalent) in the above three flasks
、 及び 2—ジヒドロフラン (77. 9質量部、 ·! . 0モル当量) を滴下した 〇 2020/174767 56 卩(:171?2019/044334 , And 2-dihydrofuran (77.9 parts by mass, ...!.0 molar equivalent) were added dropwise. 〇2020/174767 56 卩(:171?2019/044334
後に、 20°〇±2°〇の温度範囲で1. 5時間撹拌した。 次に、 液温を 35 °〇 まで昇温して 2時間撹拌した。 ヌッチエにキヨーワード 200、 及びキヨー ワード 1 000 (共に協和化学工業株式会社製) をこの順に敷き詰めた後、 反応液をろ過することでろ過液を得た。 得られたろ過液に 1\/1巳 1~1〇 (0. 0 01 2質量部) を加えた後、 40°〇で減圧濃縮することで、 2—テトラヒド ロフラニルアクリレート (八丁1~1 、 アクリル酸テトラヒドロー 21~1 -フラ ン _2—イル) 1 4〇. 8質量部を無色油状物として得た (収率 99. 0% After that, the mixture was stirred for 1.5 hours in the temperature range of 20°±2°°. Next, the liquid temperature was raised to 35° and stirred for 2 hours. Kyoward 200 and Kyoward 1 000 (both manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) were spread in this order in this order, and the reaction liquid was filtered to obtain a filtrate. To the obtained filtrate, 1\/1M 1 to 10 (0.001 2 parts by mass) was added, followed by concentration under reduced pressure at 40° 〇 to obtain 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (8 to 1 1, tetrahydro-acrylic acid 21 ~ 1-furan_2-yl) 14.8 mass parts was obtained as a colorless oil (yield 99.0%
[0245] <重合体
Figure imgf000058_0001
の合成>
[0245] <Polymer
Figure imgf000058_0001
Synthesis>
3つロフラスコに酢酸プロピル (75. 0質量部、 昭和電工株式会社製) を入れ、 窒素雰囲気下において 90°〇に昇温した。 1\/1八丁1~1 (40質量部 ) 、 1\/11\/1八 (1 5質量部) 、 〇1~11\/1八 (1 5質量部) 、 巳八 (30質量部)Propyl acetate (75.0 parts by mass, manufactured by Showa Denko KK) was placed in the three flasks and heated to 90° under a nitrogen atmosphere. 1\/1 Hatcho 1 ~ 1 (40 parts by mass), 1\/11\/1/8 (15 parts by mass), 〇1 ~ 11\/1/8 (15 parts by mass), Minpachi (30 parts by mass) )
、 ー601 (4. 0質量部) 、 及び酢酸プロピル (75. 0質量部) を含 む溶液を、 90°〇± 2°〇の温度範囲に維持した上記 3つロフラスコ中の溶液 に 2時間かけて滴下した。 滴下終了後, 90。〇± 2°〇の温度範囲にて 2時間 撹拌することで、 重合体 _ 1 を含む溶液 (固形分濃度 4〇. 0%) を得た , -601 (4.0 parts by mass), and propyl acetate (75.0 parts by mass) are added to the solution in the above three flasks maintained in the temperature range of 90° 〇 ± 2° 〇 for 2 hours. It dripped over. 90 after the dropping. A solution containing polymer _ 1 (solid content concentration 4.0%) was obtained by stirring for 2 hours within the temperature range of ±2°.
[0246] <重合体 _ 2〜重合体 _ 1 1の合成例> <Synthesis Example of Polymer _2 to Polymer _ 11>
モノマーの種類及び使用量を下記表 1 に従って変更したこと以外は、 重合 体八_ 1 と同様の方法で重合体 2〜重合体
Figure imgf000058_0002
1 1 をそれぞれ含む溶液 を得た。 溶液中の固形分濃度は、 40. 0質量%とした。
Polymer 2 to polymer were prepared in the same manner as polymer 8_1, except that the type and amount of monomer used were changed according to Table 1 below.
Figure imgf000058_0002
A solution containing 11 was obtained. The solid content concentration in the solution was 40.0% by mass.
[0247] [表 1] [0247] [Table 1]
Figure imgf000058_0003
〇 2020/174767 57 卩(:171?2019/044334
Figure imgf000058_0003
〇 2020/174 767 57 卩 (:171?2019/044334
[0248] 表 1中、 「モノマー 」 は、 酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単 位を形成するモノマーを意味する。 表 1中、 「モノマー巳」 は、 酸分解性基 で保護された酸基を有する構成単位以外の構成単位を形成するモノマーを意 味する。 表 1中、 「一」 は、 該当するモノマーを使用していないことを意味 する。 また、 表 1 に記載されたガラス転移温度 (丁 9) 、 酸価、 及び重量平 均分子量
Figure imgf000059_0001
は、 上述の方法により測定した。
[0248] In Table 1, "monomer" means a monomer forming a constituent unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. In Table 1, "monomer" means a monomer forming a structural unit other than a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. In Table 1, "one" means that the corresponding monomer was not used. In addition, the glass transition temperature (Table 9), acid value, and weight average molecular weight listed in Table 1
Figure imgf000059_0001
Was measured by the method described above.
[0249] <実施例 1〜 1 2、 及び比較例 1〜 2 > [0249] <Examples 1 to 12 and Comparative Examples 1 to 2>
[感光性転写材料の作製] [Preparation of photosensitive transfer material]
各重合体 ( _ 1〜 _ 1 1) を含む溶液、 光酸発生剤、 塩基性化合物、 及び界面活性剤を下記表 2に記載された固形分質量比となるよう秤量した後 、 上記各成分と酢酸プロピルとを溶解混合することによって固形分濃度 1 〇 質量%の混合液を得た。 混合液を口径〇. 2 のポリテトラフルオロエチ レン製フイルタで濾過することで感光性樹脂組成物 (感光性転写材料用組成 物) を得た。 感光性樹脂組成物を、 仮支持体として厚さ 3〇 のポリエチ レンテレフタレートフイルムの上に、 スリツ ト状ノズルを用いて乾燥膜厚が 4 . 〇 となるように塗布した。 その後、 平均温度 8 5 °〇の乾燥ゾーンを 5 0秒間かけて通過させることで仮支持体上に感光性樹脂組成物層を形成し た。 最後に、 保護フイルムとしてポリエチレンフイルム (トレデガー社製、
Figure imgf000059_0002
を感光性樹脂組成物層上に圧着することで、 実施例 1〜 1 2及 び比較例 1〜 2の感光性転写材料をそれぞれ作製した。
A solution containing each polymer (_ 1 to _ 11), a photo-acid generator, a basic compound, and a surfactant were weighed so as to have a solid content mass ratio shown in Table 2 below, and then the above-mentioned components And propyl acetate were dissolved and mixed to obtain a mixed solution having a solid content concentration of 10% by mass. A photosensitive resin composition (composition for photosensitive transfer material) was obtained by filtering the mixed solution through a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene having a diameter of 0.2. The photosensitive resin composition was applied as a temporary support onto a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 30 using a slit-shaped nozzle so that the dry film thickness was 4.0. Then, a photosensitive resin composition layer was formed on the temporary support by passing through a drying zone having an average temperature of 85° for 50 seconds. Finally, a polyethylene film (made by Tredegar,
Figure imgf000059_0002
By pressure-bonding onto the photosensitive resin composition layer, the photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 1 to 12 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 were produced.
[0250] [基板の作製] [0250] [Fabrication of substrate]
下記表 2に記載された各基板上に、 スバツタ法により厚さ
Figure imgf000059_0003
On each substrate listed in Table 2 below, the thickness is
Figure imgf000059_0003
層を積層することで、 銅層つき基板を作製した。 A substrate with a copper layer was produced by stacking the layers.
[0251 ] [感度 (露光感度) 評価] [0251] [Sensitivity (exposure sensitivity) evaluation]
作製した各感光性転写材料を、 口ール温度 1 3 0 °(:、 線圧〇.
Figure imgf000059_0004
及び線速度 3 . 0〇! /分のラミネート条件で銅層つき基板に貼り合わせた。 仮支持体を剥離せずに、 線幅 2 0 のラインアンドスペースパターン (0 リ ソ比= 1 : 1) マスクを介して超高圧水銀灯を用いて感光性樹脂組成物 〇 2020/174767 58 卩(:171?2019/044334
Each of the prepared photosensitive transfer materials had a mouth temperature of 1300 ° (:, linear pressure ◯.
Figure imgf000059_0004
And was laminated on a substrate with a copper layer under a lamination condition of linear velocity of 3.0! A line-and-space pattern with a line width of 20 (0 lithography ratio = 1:1) without peeling off the temporary support. A photosensitive resin composition using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp through a mask. 〇 2020/174767 58 卩 (:171?2019/044334
層を露光後、 1時間放置した後に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。 現像は、 2After exposing the layer, the temporary support was peeled off and developed after standing for 1 hour. Development is 2
2 °〇の 0 . 9 %炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、 シャワー現像で 4 0秒行った 。 上記方法にて線幅 2 0 のラインアンドスペースパターンを形成した際 、 2〇 のスペース部の残渣を走査型電子顕微鏡 (3巳 IV!) を用いて観察 することで、 完全に残渣がなくなる露光量を求めた。 上記露光量を、 下記評 価 (解像性評価、 パターン幅変化率で適用する露光量とした。 Shower development was carried out for 40 seconds using a 0.9% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 2 ° . When a line-and-space pattern with a line width of 20 was formed by the above method, the residue in the space of 20 was observed using a scanning electron microscope (3M IV!) to completely eliminate the residue. The amount was calculated. The above-mentioned exposure amount was defined as the following evaluation (resolution evaluation, exposure amount applied by pattern width change rate).
[0252] [評価] [0252] [Evaluation]
(ラミネート適性 (口ールツーロール方式) ) (Lamination suitability (mouth-to-roll method))
作製した各感光性転写材料から保護フィルムを剥がした後、 口ール温度 1 After peeling off the protective film from each of the prepared photosensitive transfer materials, the mouth temperature 1
3 0 °0, 線圧〇.
Figure imgf000060_0001
線速度 (搬送速度) 3 . 0〇! /分のラミネート 条件で、 感光性転写材料を銅層つき基板に口ールツーロール方式にて貼り合 わせた。 貼り合わせ後の口ールから 5 0〇 角の試験片を切り出し、 感光性 樹脂組成物と銅層との密着状態を目視で確認した。 試験片において泡及び浮 きがない状態で感光性樹脂組成物層が銅層に密着している面積の割合 (%) を下記式により求め、 以下の基準に従って、 高温高速条件下でのラミネート 適性を評価した。 評価結果を表 2に示す。 感光性樹脂組成物層の密着面積 ( %) が大きいほど、 高温高速条件下でのラミネート適性に優れるといえる。 式:面積 (%) = [ (感光性樹脂組成物層の密着面積) / (試験片の面積 ) 1 X 1 0 0
30 ° 0, linear pressure 〇.
Figure imgf000060_0001
The photosensitive transfer material was laminated on the substrate with the copper layer by the roll-to-roll method under the laminating condition of linear velocity (conveyance speed) of 3.0! A 500-square square test piece was cut out from the mouth after bonding, and the state of adhesion between the photosensitive resin composition and the copper layer was visually confirmed. The ratio (%) of the area where the photosensitive resin composition layer adheres to the copper layer without bubbles and floating in the test piece was calculated by the following formula, and according to the following criteria, the suitability for lamination under high temperature and high speed conditions Was evaluated. Table 2 shows the evaluation results. It can be said that the larger the adhesion area (%) of the photosensitive resin composition layer, the more excellent the suitability for lamination under high temperature and high speed conditions. Formula: Area (%) = [(Adhesive area of photosensitive resin composition layer) / (Area of test piece) 1 X 1 0 0
[0253] 一基準一 [0253] One standard
面積 (%) が 9 5 %以上であり、 感光性樹脂組成物層に亀裂が入っていな い: 5 The area (%) is 95% or more, and the photosensitive resin composition layer is not cracked: 5
面積 (%) が 9 5 %以上であるが、 感光性樹脂組成物層に亀裂が入ってい る : 4 Area (%) is 95% or more, but there are cracks in the photosensitive resin composition layer: 4
面積 (%) が 8 5 %以上 9 5 %未満である : 3 Area (%) is 85% or more and less than 95%: 3
面積 (%) が 8 5 %未満である : 2 Area (%) is less than 85%: 2
[0254] (解像性) [0254] (Resolution)
作製した各感光性転写材料を、 口ール温度 1 3 0 °(:、 線圧〇. 〇 2020/174767 59 卩(:171?2019/044334 Each of the prepared photosensitive transfer materials had a mouth temperature of 1300 ° (:, linear pressure ◯. 〇2020/174767 59 卩(:171?2019/044334
及び線速度 3 . 0〇! /分のラミネート条件で銅層つき基板に貼り合わせた。 仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅 3 〜 2〇 のラインアンドスべースパタ —ン (〇リ I ソ比 = 1 : 1) マスクを介して超高圧水銀灯を用いて感光性樹 脂組成物層を上記感度評価で求めた露光量で露光した後、 3時間放置した後 に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。 現像は、 2 2 °〇の 1 . 0 %炭酸ナトリウム 水溶液を用い、 シャワー現像で 4 0秒行った。 このように得られたラインア ンドスペースパターンのうち、 最も線幅が小さいパターンを到達解像度とし た。 また到達解像度を判断する際、 走査型電子顕微鏡 (3巳1\/〇 を用いてパ ターンを観察し、 パターンの側壁部に大きな荒れが生じている場合には、 解 像できていないとした。 得られた到達解像度に基づき、 以下の基準に従って 、 解像性を評価した。 評価結果を表 2に示す。 到達解像度が小さいほど、 露 光後に放置された場合であっても解像性に優れたパターンが得られるといえ る。 And was laminated on a substrate with a copper layer under a lamination condition of linear velocity of 3.0! A line-and-space pattern with a line width of 3 to 20 without peeling off the temporary support (〇 Li-iso ratio = 1:1) Using a high-pressure mercury lamp through a mask, a photosensitive resin composition layer Was exposed with the exposure amount obtained by the above-mentioned sensitivity evaluation, and after standing for 3 hours, the temporary support was peeled off and developed. The development was carried out by a shower development for 40 seconds using a 1.0% aqueous sodium carbonate solution at 220 ° . Of the line and space patterns obtained in this way, the pattern with the smallest line width was used as the ultimate resolution. Moreover, when deciding the ultimate resolution, the pattern was observed using a scanning electron microscope (3×1\/○), and if the side wall of the pattern was significantly roughened, it was determined that the pattern could not be resolved. Based on the obtained ultimate resolution, the resolution was evaluated according to the following criteria: The evaluation results are shown in Table 2. The smaller the ultimate resolution, the better the resolution even when left after exposure. It can be said that an excellent pattern can be obtained.
[0255] 一基準一 [0255] One standard one
到達解像度が 6 未満である : 5 Reachable resolution is less than 6: 5
到達解像度が 8 未満、 6 〇!以上である : 4 . 5 The ultimate resolution is less than 8 and more than 60!: 4.5
到達解像度が 1 〇 未満、 8 以上である : 4 The ultimate resolution is less than 10 and is 8 or more: 4
到達解像度が 1 5 未満、 1 〇 以上である : 3 The ultimate resolution is less than 15 and greater than or equal to 10: 3
到達解像度が 2 0 〇!未満、 1 5 以上である : 2 The ultimate resolution is less than 200! and 15 or more: 2
到達解像度が 2 0 以上である : 1 The ultimate resolution is 20 or more: 1
[0256] (パターン幅変化率) [0256] (Pattern width change rate)
作製した各感光性転写材料を、 口ール温度 1 3 0 °(:、 線圧〇.
Figure imgf000061_0001
及び線速度 3 . 0〇! /分のラミネート条件で銅層つき基板に貼り合わせた。 仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅 6 のラインアンドスペースパターン (0リ ソ比 1 : 1) マスクを介して超高圧水銀灯を用いて感光性樹脂組成物層を 感度評価で求めた露光量で露光した後、 3時間放置した後、 及び 2 4時間放 置した後に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。 現像は、 2 2 °〇の 1 . 0 %炭酸ナ トリウム水溶液を用い、 シャワー現像で 4 0秒行った。 このように得られた 〇 2020/174767 60 卩(:171?2019/044334
Each of the prepared photosensitive transfer materials had a mouth temperature of 1300 ° (:, linear pressure ◯.
Figure imgf000061_0001
And was laminated on a substrate with a copper layer under a lamination condition of linear velocity of 3.0! Line-and-space pattern with a line width of 6 without peeling the temporary support (0 litho ratio 1:1) Through the mask, the photosensitive resin composition layer was exposed with the exposure amount obtained by the sensitivity evaluation using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp. After the exposure, it was left for 3 hours, and allowed to stand for 24 hours, and then the temporary support was peeled off and developed. The development was carried out by using a 1.0% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 22 ° and shower development for 40 seconds. Got this way 〇2020/174767 60 卩(:171?2019/044334
ラインアンドスべースパターンつき基板を得た。 上記基板上の 6 バター ン (樹脂パターン) における 3時間後のパターン幅、 及び 2 4時間後のバタ —ン幅をそれぞれ求めた。 3時間後のパターン幅に対する 2 4時間後のパタ —ン幅の変化率を、 以下の式に従って求めた。 得られたパターン幅の変化率 に基づき、 以下の基準に従って、 パターン幅変化率を評価した。 評価結果を 表 2に示す。 変化率の値が小さいほど、 露光後の時間経過による線幅の減少 が抑制されたといえ、 性能として安定であることを表す。 A substrate with a line and space pattern was obtained. The pattern width after 3 hours and the pattern width after 24 hours in 6 patterns (resin pattern) on the substrate were obtained. The change rate of the pattern width after 24 hours with respect to the pattern width after 3 hours was obtained according to the following formula. Based on the obtained change rate of the pattern width, the change rate of the pattern width was evaluated according to the following criteria. Table 2 shows the evaluation results. It can be said that the smaller the value of the rate of change is, the more the decrease in line width due to the passage of time after exposure is suppressed, and that the performance is stable.
式:パターン幅変化率 (%) = { [ 2 4時間後のパターン幅 ( ) ] / [ 3時間後のパターン幅 ( ) ] } X I 0 0 Formula: Pattern width change rate (%) = {[2 4 hours later pattern width ()] / [3 hours later pattern width () ]} X I 0 0
[0257] 一基準一 [0257] One standard one
2 %未満: 3 Less than 2%: 3
5 %未満、 2 %以上: 2 Less than 5%, 2% or more: 2
5 %以上: 1 5% or more: 1
[0258] (銅線幅変化率) [0258] (Copper wire width change rate)
作製した各感光性転写材料を、 口ール温度 1 3 0 °(:、 線圧〇.
Figure imgf000062_0001
及び線速度 3 . 0〇! /分のラミネート条件で銅層つき基板に貼り合わせた。 仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅 6 のラインアンドスペースパターン (0リ I ソ比 1 : 1) マスクを介して、 超高圧水銀灯を用いて感光性樹脂組成物層 を感度評価で求めた露光量で露光した後、 3時間放置した後、 及び 2 4時間 放置した後に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。 現像は、 2 2 °〇の 1 . 0 %炭酸 ナトリウム水溶液を用い、 シャワー現像で 4 0秒行った。 このように得られ たラインアンドスべースバターンを得た。 次いで、 銅エッチング液 (関東化 学株式会社製〇リー0 2) を用いて銅層をエッチングすることで、 銅 (実線 部 3 !_) で描画された基板を得た。 上記基板上の 6 パターン (銅バター ン) における 3時間後の銅線幅、 及び 2 4時間後の銅線幅をそれぞれ求めた 。 3時間後の銅線幅に対する 2 4時間後の銅線幅の変化率を、 以下の式に従 って求めた。 得られた銅線幅の変化率に基づき、 以下の基準に従って、 銅線 幅変化率を評価した。 評価結果を表 2に示す。 変化率の値が小さいほど、 露 〇 2020/174767 61 卩(:171?2019/044334
Each of the prepared photosensitive transfer materials had a mouth temperature of 1300 ° (:, linear pressure ◯.
Figure imgf000062_0001
And was laminated on a substrate with a copper layer under a lamination condition of linear velocity of 3.0! Exposure of the photosensitive resin composition layer obtained by sensitivity evaluation using a super high pressure mercury lamp through a line and space pattern with a line width of 6 (0 lithographic ratio 1:1) without peeling off the temporary support. After exposure for 3 hours, the film was allowed to stand for 3 hours and then for 24 hours, and then the temporary support was peeled off and developed. The development was carried out by shower development using a 1.0% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 220 ° C for 40 seconds. The line-and-space pattern obtained in this way was obtained. Next, the copper layer was etched using a copper etching solution (Kanryo Kagaku Co., Ltd., Oley 02) to obtain a substrate drawn with copper (solid line portion 3!_). The copper line width after 3 hours and the copper line width after 24 hours in the 6 patterns (copper pattern) on the above substrate were obtained, respectively. The rate of change of the copper line width after 24 hours with respect to the copper line width after 3 hours was calculated according to the following formula. Based on the obtained rate of change of the copper line width, the rate of change of the copper line width was evaluated according to the following criteria. Table 2 shows the evaluation results. The smaller the rate of change value, the more 〇 2020/174767 61 卩(:171?2019/044334
光後の時間経過による線幅の減少が抑制されたといえ、 性能として安定であ ることを表す。 It can be said that the decrease in the line width due to the passage of time after light is suppressed, indicating that the performance is stable.
式:銅線幅変化率 (%) = { [ 2 4時間後の銅線幅 ( ) ] / [ 3時間 後の銅線幅 ( ) ] } X 1 0 0 Formula: Copper wire width change rate (%) = {[Copper wire width after 24 hours ()] / [Copper wire width after 3 hours ()]} X 1 0 0
[0259] 一基準一 [0259] One standard one
5 %未満: 3 Less than 5%: 3
1 0 %未満、 5 %以上: 2 Less than 10%, more than 5%: 2
1 0 %以上: 1 10% or more: 1
[0260] [表示特性 (輝度) ] [0260] [Display characteristics (luminance)]
表示特性の 1つの指標として、 輝度について評価した。 Luminance was evaluated as one index of display characteristics.
各種ポリイミ ド基材上、 及びポリエチレンテレフタレート基材上に、 それ それ、 第 2層の導電性層として酸化インジウムスズ (丨 丁〇) 層 (厚さ 1 5 0门〇1) をスパッタリングで成膜し、 次いで、 丨 丁〇層の上に第 1層の導電 性層として銅層 (厚さ 2 0 0 n m) を真空蒸着法で成膜することにより、 基 板を作製した。 On various polyimide substrates and polyethylene terephthalate substrate, a second conductive layer, indium tin oxide (chome), layer (thickness 150 m) is formed by sputtering. and, then, by forming a copper layer (thickness 2 0 0 n m) in a vacuum vapor deposition method as the conductive layer of the first layer on the丨Ding 〇 layer, to prepare a board.
銅層上に、 作製した各感光性転写材料を貼り合わせた (線圧〇.
Figure imgf000063_0001
Each of the prepared photosensitive transfer materials was bonded onto the copper layer (linear pressure ◯.
Figure imgf000063_0001
、 線速度 3 . 〇 /分、 口ール温度 1 3 0 °〇) 。 仮支持体を剥離せずに、 一 方向に導電性層パッ ドが連結された構成を持つ図 2に示すパターンを設けた フォトマスクを用いてコンタクトパターン露光した。 , Linear velocity of 3.0/min, mouth temperature of 130 ° 〇). Contact pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with the pattern shown in FIG. 2 in which the conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
なお、 図 2に示すパターンは、 実線部 3 !_及びグレー部◦が遮光部であり 、 点線部口 !_はアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。 In the pattern shown in Fig. 2, the solid line part 3!_ and the gray part o are light-shielding parts, and the dotted line part !_ is a virtual alignment alignment frame.
その後仮支持体を剥離し、 現像、 水洗を行って図 2に示すパターンを得た 。 次いで銅エッチング液 (関東化学株式会社製〇リー0 2) を用いて銅層を エッチングした後、 丨 丁〇エッチング液 (関東化学株式会社製丨 丁〇一0 2 ) を用いて 丨 丁〇層をエッチングすることで、 銅 (実線部 3 !_) と 丨 丁〇 ( グレー部◦) とが共に図 2に示すパターンで描画された基板を得た。 After that, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain the pattern shown in FIG. Then, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Kanto Kagaku Co., Ltd. 0 Lee 02), use a copper etching solution (Kanto Kagaku Co., Ltd. 012) to obtain a copper layer. By etching, a substrate was obtained in which both copper (solid line 3!_) and sushi (gray part) were drawn in the pattern shown in Fig. 2.
次いで、 アライメントを合わせた状態で図 3に示すバターンの開口部を設 けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、 現像、 水洗を行った。 〇 2020/174767 62 卩(:171?2019/044334 Next, in alignment, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask with the opening of the pattern shown in FIG. 3, and development and washing were performed. 〇2020/174767 62 卩(:171?2019/044334
なお、 図 3に示すパターンは、 グレー部◦が遮光部であり、 点線部 0 !_は アライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。 In the pattern shown in FIG. 3, the gray area ◦ is a light-shielding area and the dotted line area 0!_ is a virtual illustration of the alignment frame.
その後、 〇リー0 2を用いて銅層をエッチングし、 残った感光性樹脂組成 物層を、 剥離液 (関東化学株式会社製< 一3 0 1) を用いて剥離し、 回路 基板を得た。 After that, the copper layer was etched by using LY 02, and the remaining photosensitive resin composition layer was peeled off by using a stripping solution (Kanto Kagaku Co., Ltd. <1301) to obtain a circuit board. ..
得られた回路基板を、 背面側から蛍光灯 (波長範囲 3 8 0〜 7 8 0 n m) で照射し、 透過する光強度を輝度計 !- 3 _ 1 0 0 (IV! 丨 !\1〇!_丁 社製) で 測定した。 The resulting circuit board was irradiated with a fluorescent lamp from the back side (the wavelength range 3 8 0~ 7 8 0 n m ), transmitted light intensity luminance meter -!!! 3 _ 1 0 0 (IV丨\ 1 〇!_Ding Co., Ltd.).
回路基板を挟まない場合の光強度 (すなわち、 蛍光灯から照射される光 の強度) に対して、 回路基板を挟んだ場合の光強度巳 (すなわち、 回路基板 を透過した光の強度) とし、 輝度維持率を以下の式に従って求めた。 得られ た輝度維持率に基づき、 以下の基準に従って、 表示特性を評価した。 評価結 果を表 2に示す。 輝度維持率の値が大きいほど、 得られた回路基板を表示装 置内に設けた場合に、 表 装置の表 特性が優れることを表す。 With respect to the light intensity when the circuit board is not sandwiched (that is, the intensity of the light emitted from the fluorescent lamp), the light intensity when the circuit board is sandwiched (that is, the intensity of the light transmitted through the circuit board), The brightness retention rate was calculated according to the following formula. Based on the obtained luminance retention rate, the display characteristics were evaluated according to the following criteria. Table 2 shows the evaluation results. The larger the value of the luminance maintenance factor, the better the display characteristics of the display device when the obtained circuit board is provided in the display device.
式:輝度維持率 (%) = [光強度巳/光強度八] X 1 0 0 Formula: Brightness maintenance ratio (%) = [Light intensity/Light intensity 8] X 1 0 0
[0261 ] 一基準一 [0261] One standard one
6 0 %以上: 2 60% or more: 2
6 0 %以下: 1 60% or less: 1
[0262] [表 2] [0262] [Table 2]
Figure imgf000064_0001
Figure imgf000064_0001
[0263] 表 2において使用される以下の略語は、 それぞれ、 下記の材料を表す。 [0263] The following abbreviations used in Table 2 represent the following materials, respectively:
[0264] <光酸発生剤> 〇 2020/174767 63 卩(:171?2019/044334 [0264] <Photoacid generator> 〇 2020/174767 63 卩 (:171?2019/044334
- 「巳_ 1」 :下記に示す構造を有する化合物 (特開 2 0 1 3— 4 7 7 6 5 号公報の段落 0 2 2 7に記載の方法に従って合成した。 ) -"Mi_1": a compound having the structure shown below (synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0 2 2 7 of JP-A No. 20 1 3-4 7 7 6 5)
[0265] [化 4] [0265] [Chemical 4]
Figure imgf000065_0001
Figure imgf000065_0001
[0266] 「巳_ 2」 :下記に示す構造を有する化合物 (商品名 八
Figure imgf000065_0002
1 0 3、 巳 八 3 社製)
[0266] "Mi_2": a compound having the structure shown below (trade name: 8
Figure imgf000065_0002
1 0 3, manufactured by Mihachi 3)
[0267] [化 5] [0267] [Chemical 5]
Figure imgf000065_0003
Figure imgf000065_0003
[0268] <界面活性剤> [0268] <Surfactant>
「〇_ 1」 :下記に示す構造を有する化合物 "○ _ 1": Compound having the structure shown below
[0269] [化 6] [0269] [Chemical 6]
Figure imgf000065_0004
Figure imgf000065_0004
觀賛繼 濯質量勉 Appreciation and rinsing mass study
觀 : 1爾〇 Number: 1 〇
[0270] <塩基性化合物> [0270] <Basic compound>
- 「0— 1」 :下記に示す構造を有する化合物 (〇1\/1丁 II) -"0-1": A compound having the structure shown below (〇1\/1c II)
[0271 ] \¥02020/174767 ¢4 ?€1/^2019/044334 [0271] \¥02020/174767 ¢4 ?€1/^2019/044334
[化 7] [Chemical 7]
Figure imgf000066_0001
Figure imgf000066_0001
0^110 0^110
[0272] <基板> [0272] <Substrate>
- 「ポリイミ ド 1」 : 丁〇 IV!巳 0 (登録商標) T V p e X (株式会社ア イ. エス. テイ製、 ヘイズ〇. 4%、 全光透過率 90%、 厚さ 50 ) -"Polyimide 1": Ding IV!M 0 (registered trademark) T V p e X (manufactured by A.S.T Co., Ltd., haze 0.4%, total light transmittance 90%, thickness 50)
- 「ポリイミ ド 2」 : 丁〇[¾1\/1巳 0 丁ソ 63 (株式会社アイ. エス. テ イ製、 ヘイズ 3. 0%、 全光透過率 88%、 厚さ 25 ) -"Polyimide 2": Dye [¾1\/1 Md. 0 Ding Seo 63 (A.S.T. Co., Ltd., haze 3.0%, total light transmittance 88%, thickness 25)
- 「ポリイミ ド 3」 :カプトン (登録商標) 1 001~1 (東レ ·デュポン株式 会社製、 全光透過率 85%以下、 厚さ 25 ) -"Polyimide 3": Kapton (registered trademark) 1 001 ~ 1 (manufactured by Toray DuPont Co., Ltd., total light transmittance of 85% or less, thickness 25)
- 「ポリエチレンテレフタレート」 :ルミラー (登録商標) 1 60360 ( 東レ株式会社製、 ヘイズ〇. 4%、 全光透過率 90%、 厚さ 1 6^^) -"Polyethylene terephthalate": Lumirror (registered trademark) 1 60360 (Toray Industries, Inc., haze 0.4%, total light transmittance 90%, thickness 16^^)
[0273] 表 2より、 実施例 1〜 1 2は、 比較例 1〜 2に比べて、 パターン幅及び銅 線幅の変化率が小さく、 高温高速条件下でのラミネート適性に優れることが わかった。 さらに、 ヘイズが小さく、 全光透過率が高いポリイミ ド 1 を用い た実施例 1〜 1 〇は、 実施例 1 1〜 1 2に比べて、 表示特性が優れることが わかった。 [0273] From Table 2, it was found that Examples 1 to 12 had a smaller change rate of the pattern width and the copper line width than Comparative Examples 1 to 2 and were excellent in laminate suitability under high temperature and high speed conditions. .. Further, it was found that Examples 1 to 10 using Polyimide 1 having a small haze and a high total light transmittance have excellent display characteristics as compared with Examples 11 to 12.
[0274] 201 9年 2月 28日に出願された日本国特許出願 201 9— 03642 [0274] 201 Japanese patent application filed on February 28, 2011 201 9—03642
9号の開示は、 その全体が参照により本明細書に取り込まれる。 本明細書に 記載された全ての文献、 特許出願、 及び技術規格は、 個々の文献、 特許出願 、 及び技術規格が参照により取り込まれることが具体的かつ個々に記載され た場合と同程度に、 本明細書に参照により取り込まれる。 The disclosure of No. 9 is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. All documents, patent applications, and technical standards mentioned herein are to the same extent as if each individual document, patent application, and technical standard were specifically and individually stated to be incorporated by reference. Incorporated herein by reference.

Claims

\¥0 2020/174767 65 ?(:17 2019/044334 請求の範囲 \¥0 2020/174767 65 ?(: 17 2019/044334 Claims
[請求項 1 ] 仮支持体と、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上である酸分解性樹脂を含 有する感光性樹脂組成物層と、 を有する感光性転写材料における前記 感光性樹脂組成物層、 及びポリイミ ド基板を接触させて、 前記感光性 転写材料と前記ポリイミ ド基板とを貼り合わせる工程を有するバター ンつき基板の製造方法。 [Claim 1] The photosensitive resin composition layer in a photosensitive transfer material, comprising: a temporary support; and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° or higher. And a polyimide substrate in contact with each other to bond the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate to each other.
[請求項 2] 前記酸分解性樹脂のガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇〜9 0 °〇であり、 前記 感光性転写材料と前記ポリイミ ド基板とを貼り合わせる工程において 、 加熱温度が 1 2 0 °〇~ 1 5 0 °〇であり、 かつ、 搬送速度が、 2 . 5 /分〜 5 . 0〇! /分である請求項 1 に記載のパターンつき基板の製 造方法。 [Claim 2] The glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is 50° to 90°°, and the heating temperature is 120° C. in the step of bonding the photosensitive transfer material and the polyimide substrate. The method for producing a patterned substrate according to claim 1, wherein the substrate is at a temperature of 0 ° to 150 ° and the transfer speed is 2.5/min to 5.0°!/min.
[請求項 3] 前記酸分解性樹脂のガラス転移温度が 5 5 °〇〜9 0 °〇である請求項 [Claim 3] The glass transition temperature of the acid-decomposable resin is 55° to 90°
1又は請求項 2に記載のパターンつき基板の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to claim 1 or claim 2.
[請求項 4] 前記酸分解性樹脂の酸価が、
Figure imgf000067_0001
[Claim 4] The acid value of the acid-decomposable resin is
Figure imgf000067_0001
9である請求項 1〜請求項 3のいずれか 1項に記載のパターンつき基 板の製造方法。 9. The method for producing a patterned substrate according to claim 1, wherein the method is 9.
[請求項 5] 前記酸分解性樹脂が、 炭素数 1〜 3の直鎖状アルキル基をエステル 位に有する (メタ) アクリレート化合物、 炭素数 1〜 3の分岐状アル キル基をエステル位に有する (メタ) アクリレート化合物、 炭素数 4 〜 2 0の環状アルキル基をエステル位に有する (メタ) アクリレート 化合物、 及び炭素数 4〜 2 0の環状エーテル基をエステル位に有する (メタ) アクリレート化合物よりなる群から選択される少なくとも 1 種の (メタ) アクリレート化合物由来の構成単位を前記酸分解性樹脂 の全質量に対して 9 0質量%以上含み、 かつ、 アクリル酸、 及びアク リレート化合物よりなる群から選択される少なくとも 1種のアクリル 化合物由来の構成単位を前記酸分解性樹脂の全質量に対して 0質量% 〜 3 0質量%含む請求項 1〜請求項 4のいずれか 1項に記載のバター ンつき基板の製造方法。 〇 2020/174767 66 卩(:171?2019/044334 [Claim 5] The acid-decomposable resin has a (meth)acrylate compound having a linear alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at an ester position, and a branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms at an ester position (Meth) acrylate compound, which has a C4-C20 cyclic alkyl group at the ester position, and (meth) acrylate compound, and which has a C4-C20 cyclic ether group at the ester position (meth) acrylate compound From the group consisting of at least one (meth)acrylate compound-derived structural unit selected from the group of 90% by mass or more based on the total mass of the acid-decomposable resin, and comprising acrylic acid and an acrylate compound. The butter according to any one of claims 1 to 4, containing 0% by mass to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the acid-decomposable resin, the constituent unit derived from at least one selected acrylic compound. Manufacturing method of printed circuit board. 〇2020/174767 66 卩(:171?2019/044334
[請求項 6] 前記ポリイミ ド基板のヘイズが、 〇. 5 %以下である請求項 1〜請 求項 5のいずれか 1項に記載のパターンつき基板の製造方法。 [Claim 6] The method for producing a patterned substrate according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the haze of the polyimide substrate is 0.5% or less.
[請求項 7] 前記ポリイミ ド基板の全光透過率が、 8 5 %以上である請求項 1〜 請求項 6のいずれか 1項に記載のパターンつき基板の製造方法。 7. The method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to claim 1, wherein the polyimide substrate has a total light transmittance of 85% or more.
[請求項 8] 前記貼り合わせる工程後の前記感光性樹脂組成物層をパターン露光 する工程と、 [Claim 8] a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer after the step of laminating,
前記パターン露光された感光性樹脂組成物層を現像して感光性樹脂 組成物層のパターンを形成する工程と、 Developing the pattern-exposed photosensitive resin composition layer to form a pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer,
を有する請求項 1〜請求項 7のいずれか 1項に記載のパターンつき 基板の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a patterned substrate according to claim 1, further comprising:
[請求項 9] 前記ポリイミ ド基板が、 導電性層を有する請求項 1〜請求項 8のい ずれか 1項に記載のパターンつき基板の製造方法。 [Claim 9] The method for producing a patterned substrate according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the polyimide substrate has a conductive layer.
[請求項 10] 請求項 9に記載のパターンつき基板の製造方法によりパターンつき 基板を製造する工程と、 [Claim 10] A step of producing a patterned substrate by the method for producing a patterned substrate according to claim 9,
前記パターンつき基板において前記感光性樹脂組成物層のパターン が形成されていない領域に露出する前記導電性層をエッチングするエ 程と、 A step of etching the conductive layer exposed in a region of the patterned substrate where the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer is not formed,
前記感光性樹脂組成物層のパターンを除去する工程と、 A step of removing the pattern of the photosensitive resin composition layer,
をこの順で有する回路基板の製造方法。 A method for manufacturing a circuit board having, in this order.
[請求項 1 1 ] 前記エッチングする工程と前記除去する工程との間に、 前記感光性 樹脂組成物層を全面露光する工程を有する請求項 1 0に記載の回路基 板の製造方法。 [Claim 11] The method for producing a circuit board according to claim 10, comprising a step of exposing the entire surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer between the etching step and the removing step.
[請求項 12] 前記導電性層が、 銅層、 又は銀層である請求項 1 0又は請求項 1 1 に記載の回路基板の製造方法。 12. The method for producing a circuit board according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the conductive layer is a copper layer or a silver layer.
[請求項 13] 請求項 1 〇〜請求項 1 2のいずれか 1項に記載の回路基板の製造方 法を含むタッチパネルの製造方法。 [Claim 13] A method for manufacturing a touch panel, including the method for manufacturing the circuit board according to any one of claims 10 to 12.
[請求項 14] 請求項 1 〇〜請求項 1 2のいずれか 1項に記載の回路基板の製造方 法により製造された回路基板を準備する工程を有するタッチパネルの 〇 2020/174767 67 卩(:171?2019/044334 [Claim 14] A touch panel having a step of preparing a circuit board manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit board according to any one of claims 10 to 12. 〇 2020/174767 67 卩 (: 171?2019/044334
製造方法。 Production method.
[請求項 15] ポリイミ ド基板と、 ガラス転移温度が 5 0 °〇以上である酸分解性樹 脂を含有する感光性樹脂組成物層と、 を有する積層体。 15. A laminate comprising a polyimide substrate and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing an acid-decomposable resin having a glass transition temperature of 50 ° C. or higher.
PCT/JP2019/044334 2019-02-28 2019-11-12 Pattern-added substrate manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, touch panel manufacturing method, and laminate WO2020174767A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021501569A JPWO2020174767A1 (en) 2019-02-28 2019-11-12 Patterned board manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, touch panel manufacturing method, and laminate
CN201980093022.8A CN113474728A (en) 2019-02-28 2019-11-12 Method for manufacturing substrate with pattern, method for manufacturing circuit substrate, method for manufacturing touch panel, and laminate

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019036429 2019-02-28
JP2019-036429 2019-02-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020174767A1 true WO2020174767A1 (en) 2020-09-03

Family

ID=72238871

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/044334 WO2020174767A1 (en) 2019-02-28 2019-11-12 Pattern-added substrate manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, touch panel manufacturing method, and laminate

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2020174767A1 (en)
CN (1) CN113474728A (en)
WO (1) WO2020174767A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH02275956A (en) * 1988-12-23 1990-11-09 Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd Photoresist composition
JPH03192792A (en) * 1989-12-21 1991-08-22 Hitachi Chem Co Ltd Manufacture of printed wiring board
JP2004272182A (en) * 2002-04-24 2004-09-30 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Method for forming image
JP2018095687A (en) * 2016-12-09 2018-06-21 株式会社ダイセル Resin for photoresist, method for producing photoresist resin, resin composition for photoresist, and pattern formation method
WO2018155193A1 (en) * 2017-02-22 2018-08-30 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000227665A (en) * 1998-11-02 2000-08-15 Kansai Paint Co Ltd Pattern forming method
WO2016163187A1 (en) * 2015-04-07 2016-10-13 富士フイルム株式会社 Negative active light sensitive or radiation sensitive resin composition, negative active light sensitive or radiation sensitive film, pattern forming method and method for manufacturing electronic device
CN107132731B (en) * 2016-02-26 2021-10-15 富士胶片株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
IL270030B2 (en) * 2017-04-21 2023-12-01 Fujifilm Corp Photosensitive composition for euv light, pattern forming method, and method for manufacturing electronic device

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH02275956A (en) * 1988-12-23 1990-11-09 Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd Photoresist composition
JPH03192792A (en) * 1989-12-21 1991-08-22 Hitachi Chem Co Ltd Manufacture of printed wiring board
JP2004272182A (en) * 2002-04-24 2004-09-30 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Method for forming image
JP2018095687A (en) * 2016-12-09 2018-06-21 株式会社ダイセル Resin for photoresist, method for producing photoresist resin, resin composition for photoresist, and pattern formation method
WO2018155193A1 (en) * 2017-02-22 2018-08-30 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113474728A (en) 2021-10-01
JPWO2020174767A1 (en) 2021-11-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6985974B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method
JP6999693B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, and wiring manufacturing method
JP6574846B2 (en) Dry film resist, circuit wiring manufacturing method, circuit wiring, input device and display device
WO2020105457A1 (en) Transfer material, resin pattern production method, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method
TW201922815A (en) Method for producing a circuit wiring, method for producing a touch panel, and method for producing a patterned substrate
KR20190003641A (en) METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING A SUBSTRATE WITH A PATTERNED METHOD
TW202024150A (en) Method for producing substrate with pattern, method for producing circuit substrate and method for producing touch panel
JP2022069472A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and its manufacturing method, manufacturing method of resin pattern, as well as, manufacturing method of circuit wiring
TW201912667A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method of manufacturing the same, and method of manufacturing circuit wiring
TW202041969A (en) Conductive transfer material, method for producing substrate with pattern, laminate, and touch panel
WO2020158316A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern production method, circuit wiring production method, touch panel production method, and, film and production method therefor
JP7007308B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method.
TWI746802B (en) Photosensitive transfer materials, method for producing circuit wiring and method for producing touch panel
JP7011047B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing resist pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, touch panel, and touch panel display device.
WO2020174767A1 (en) Pattern-added substrate manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, touch panel manufacturing method, and laminate
JP6832899B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2019151534A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, and manufacturing method for touch panel
JPWO2020116068A1 (en) Transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
TW202003595A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP7011046B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, touch panel, and touch panel display device
WO2019021622A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method
JP7048332B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material and its manufacturing method, resin pattern manufacturing method, and circuit wiring manufacturing method.
TW202112856A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing wiring line, and method for producing touch panel
TW202003594A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
TW201938384A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19917040

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021501569

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19917040

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1